1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
503 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
510 \begin_inset Note Note
513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
514 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code box prevent that the term
516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
524 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
525 More about \SpecialChar TeX
526 Code is described in section
531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
533 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
537 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 is explained in section
543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
545 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
555 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 See section 5.1 of the
569 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
573 \begin_layout Chapter
574 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
578 \begin_layout Section
579 Basic File Operations
580 \begin_inset Index idx
583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
592 \begin_layout Standard
597 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
598 in addition to some more advanced operations:
601 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
639 arg "buffer-new-template"
645 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \begin_layout Itemize
725 arg "buffer-write-as"
731 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \begin_layout Standard
760 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
761 a few minor differences.
764 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
775 command lists the available templates.
776 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
777 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
778 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
786 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
793 \begin_layout Standard
794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
826 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
827 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
828 is just that — a big, blank space.
836 \begin_layout Standard
857 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
865 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
883 will reload the document from disk.
884 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
885 and want to restore it to the last save.
894 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
895 them as your changes.
898 \begin_layout Section
899 Basic Editing Features
900 \begin_inset Index idx
903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
912 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
921 can perform cut and paste operations
922 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
923 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
924 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
925 editing features and how to access
927 We will start with cut and paste.
930 \begin_layout Standard
931 As you might expect, the
935 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
936 various other editing features.
937 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
941 \begin_layout Itemize
947 \begin_inset Index idx
950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
979 \begin_layout Itemize
985 \begin_inset Index idx
988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1017 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset Index idx
1026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_layout Itemize
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1071 \begin_layout Itemize
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1085 \begin_inset Index idx
1088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 \begin_inset Index idx
1100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1115 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1125 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1131 \begin_layout Standard
1132 The first three are self-explanatory.
1133 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1134 and other programs by
1155 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1156 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1161 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1162 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1163 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1164 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1165 into individual cells.
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1174 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1175 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1179 \begin_layout Standard
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1188 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1190 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1205 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1206 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1207 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space \space{}
1216 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1217 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1223 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1233 \begin_inset space ~
1242 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1243 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1245 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1254 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1255 start a new paragraph.
1256 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1257 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1282 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1285 paste from the primary selection.
1286 This is normally the currently selected text.
1289 \begin_layout Standard
1292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1316 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1322 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 button to skip the current word.
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1348 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1352 \begin_inset space ~
1357 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1359 If the toggle is set, searching for
1360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1371 will not match the word
1372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1386 Match whole words only
1388 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1389 to only find complete words, e.
1390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1419 offers also an advanced
1422 \begin_inset space ~
1426 \begin_inset space ~
1431 feature that is described in sec.
1432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1438 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1445 \begin_layout Standard
1446 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1447 \begin_inset space \space{}
1451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1459 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1461 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1466 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1473 \begin_layout Standard
1477 arg "inset-select-all"
1480 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1481 When the cursor is inside an inset
1484 arg "inset-select-all"
1487 selects the content of the inset.
1491 arg "inset-select-all"
1494 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1499 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1502 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1506 \begin_layout Section
1508 \begin_inset Index idx
1511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1518 \begin_inset Index idx
1521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1530 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1540 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1546 or the toolbar button
1552 to undo some mistake.
1553 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1555 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1558 or the toolbar button
1565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1572 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1580 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1589 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1590 This is a consequence of the 100
1591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1594 step undo limit mentioned above.
1597 \begin_layout Standard
1606 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1608 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1612 \begin_layout Section
1614 \begin_inset Index idx
1617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1630 \begin_layout Enumerate
1635 \begin_layout Itemize
1640 once anywhere in the edit window.
1641 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1645 \begin_layout Enumerate
1650 \begin_layout Itemize
1657 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1663 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1664 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_layout Enumerate
1679 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1683 \begin_layout Standard
1684 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1685 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1689 \begin_layout Section
1691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1693 name "sec:Navigating"
1698 \begin_inset Index idx
1701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1710 \begin_layout Standard
1712 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1715 \begin_layout Itemize
1720 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1721 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1725 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1727 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1729 \begin_inset space ~
1734 or by the toolbar button
1737 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1743 \begin_layout Itemize
1744 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1746 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1749 and use the same menu to return to them.
1750 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1753 \begin_layout Standard
1757 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1762 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1763 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1765 \begin_inset space ~
1770 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1771 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1772 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1773 your last editing position.
1776 \begin_layout Standard
1781 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1785 \begin_layout Subsection
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1789 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1798 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1799 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1807 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1811 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1818 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1823 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1829 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1830 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1831 dialog and to modify the citation.
1834 \begin_layout Standard
1835 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1837 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1838 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1846 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1850 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1851 you further to control the display.
1856 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1857 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1863 option keeps it in the current view state.
1864 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1865 \begin_inset space ~
1868 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1869 \begin_inset space ~
1872 3, the subsections of sections
1873 \begin_inset space ~
1876 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1881 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1882 \begin_inset space ~
1886 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1896 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1899 \begin_layout Standard
1906 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1907 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1921 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1922 So, for example, you can move section
1923 \begin_inset space ~
1927 \begin_inset space ~
1930 2.4 or after section
1931 \begin_inset space ~
1936 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1949 (or the corresponding key bindings
1957 ) you can change the level of sections.
1958 So you can for example make section
1959 \begin_inset space ~
1963 \begin_inset space ~
1967 \begin_inset space ~
1973 \begin_layout Section
1974 Input/Word Completion
1975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1977 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1982 \begin_inset Index idx
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1992 \begin_inset Index idx
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2026 \begin_layout Standard
2028 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2030 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2031 is used to propose completions.
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2043 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2050 \begin_inset space ~
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2059 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2063 \begin_inset space ~
2068 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2069 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2073 \begin_inset space ~
2079 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2080 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2081 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2082 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2087 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2088 completions available.
2093 key to accept a proposed completion.
2094 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2095 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2096 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2103 \begin_layout Standard
2104 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2105 ing options for text.
2106 The special math option
2110 enables characters to be composed.
2111 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2112 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2115 , you can then input the characters
2116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2127 to a formula to get it.
2128 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2129 of the math toolbar.
2130 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2134 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2135 's installation folder.
2136 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2145 \begin_layout Section
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_inset Index idx
2160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_inset Index idx
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2223 \begin_layout Standard
2224 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2238 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2241 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2245 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2252 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2263 \begin_inset space ~
2271 \begin_inset space ~
2292 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2296 \begin_layout Labeling
2297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2301 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2302 LatexCommand nomenclature
2304 description "Tabulator key"
2310 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2312 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2326 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2330 , especially section
2331 \begin_inset space ~
2335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2337 reference "subsec:Lists"
2343 If you are still confused, look in the
2348 \begin_inset Newline newline
2356 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2357 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2361 \begin_layout Labeling
2362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2366 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2367 LatexCommand nomenclature
2369 description "Escape key"
2376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2383 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2384 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2387 \begin_layout Labeling
2388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2394 \begin_inset space ~
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2405 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2406 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2410 \begin_layout Standard
2411 There are three modifier keys:
2414 \begin_layout Labeling
2415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2433 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2434 LatexCommand nomenclature
2436 description "Control key"
2440 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2441 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2445 \begin_layout Itemize
2454 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2457 \begin_layout Itemize
2466 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2469 \begin_layout Itemize
2478 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2482 \begin_layout Labeling
2483 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2501 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2502 LatexCommand nomenclature
2504 description "Shift key"
2508 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2509 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2512 \begin_layout Labeling
2513 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2531 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2532 LatexCommand nomenclature
2534 description "Alt or Meta key"
2538 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2539 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2540 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2546 \begin_inset Newline newline
2549 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2551 menu accelerator keys
2554 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2555 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2559 \begin_layout Standard
2560 For example, the sequence
2561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset space ~
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2604 \begin_inset space ~
2610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2620 \begin_layout Standard
2625 manual lists all other things bound to the
2633 \begin_layout Standard
2634 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2636 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2637 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2638 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2639 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2640 The \SpecialChar LyX
2641 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2642 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2643 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2645 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2661 followed by a capital
2668 \begin_layout Chapter
2671 \begin_inset Index idx
2674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2684 \begin_layout Section
2686 \begin_inset Index idx
2689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2698 \begin_layout Subsection
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2703 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2704 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2705 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2706 numbering schemes, and so on.
2707 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2708 and format the title of your document differently.
2711 \begin_layout Standard
2716 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2717 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2718 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2719 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2720 picks one for you by default.
2721 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2724 \begin_layout Subsection
2726 \begin_inset Index idx
2729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2738 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2745 \begin_layout Standard
2746 You can select a class using the
2748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2749 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2753 \begin_inset Index idx
2756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2763 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2771 \begin_layout Standard
2772 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2777 \begin_layout Description
2778 Article for basic articles
2781 \begin_layout Description
2782 Report for basic reports
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 Book for writing a book
2789 \begin_layout Description
2790 Letter for US-style letters
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2795 only uses if you have installed
2796 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2797 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2798 distributions will include
2800 Here are some of the classes.
2801 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2803 Special Document Classes
2812 \begin_layout Description
2813 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2816 \begin_layout Description
2817 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2821 \begin_layout Description
2822 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2826 \begin_layout Description
2827 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2828 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2829 There are three article layouts available.
2830 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2831 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2832 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2833 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2838 sequential numbering
2839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2842 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2843 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2844 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2845 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 Beamer Layout for presentations
2852 \begin_layout Description
2853 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2854 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2855 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2856 with \SpecialChar LyX
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2864 \begin_layout Description
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2869 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2872 \begin_layout Description
2873 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2876 \begin_layout Description
2877 Foils Used to make transparencies
2880 \begin_layout Description
2881 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2882 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2883 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2884 with \SpecialChar LyX
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2890 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2897 \begin_layout Description
2898 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2901 \begin_layout Description
2902 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2903 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2904 (Is used by this document.)
2907 \begin_layout Description
2908 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2915 \begin_layout Description
2920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2927 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2928 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2930 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Slides Used to make transparencies
2938 \begin_layout Description
2940 \begin_inset space ~
2943 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2944 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2954 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2960 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2961 of the document classes.
2964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2968 \begin_layout Standard
2969 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2972 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2974 \begin_inset Index idx
2977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2995 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2997 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3000 \begin_layout Standard
3003 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3008 , are highly specialized.
3010 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3011 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3012 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3014 by some document class.
3015 There are just too many of them.
3016 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3019 \begin_layout Standard
3020 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3028 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3029 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3030 document class for a new file.
3032 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3037 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3046 manual for information on how to install them.
3047 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3053 \begin_layout Standard
3054 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3055 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3056 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3057 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3058 class files to be used for dissertation
3059 s submitted to those universities.
3060 The \SpecialChar LyX
3061 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3063 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3067 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3073 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3080 name "subsec:Modules"
3085 \begin_inset Index idx
3088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 \begin_layout Standard
3098 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3099 chosen document class.
3100 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3101 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 \begin_inset Index idx
3115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3122 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3126 \begin_layout Standard
3127 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3128 packages or file format converters that are not always
3129 installed by default.
3131 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3132 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3133 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3134 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3136 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 file without the missing prerequisites.
3138 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3139 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3142 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3146 \begin_inset Index idx
3149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3169 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3173 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3181 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3183 will advise you about these things.
3191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3195 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3200 \begin_inset Index idx
3203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3204 Document ! Local Layout
3212 \begin_layout Standard
3213 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3214 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3215 : They are intended to be used in
3216 a variety of different documents.
3217 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3218 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3219 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3220 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3221 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3223 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3241 manual for information on how to use it.
3244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Each class has a default set of options.
3250 Here's a quick table describing them:
3253 \begin_layout Standard
3254 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3260 \begin_layout Standard
3262 \begin_inset Tabular
3263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3264 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3266 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3267 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3268 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3723 \begin_layout Standard
3724 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3730 \begin_layout Standard
3731 You're probably also wondering what
3732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3736 \begin_inset space ~
3740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3744 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3745 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3750 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3755 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3765 headings, there are also
3773 headings, and so on.
3774 We will describe these headings fully in section
3775 \begin_inset space ~
3779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3781 reference "subsec:Headings"
3788 \begin_layout Subsection
3790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3792 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3797 \begin_inset Index idx
3800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 \begin_inset Index idx
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3819 \begin_layout Standard
3820 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3829 \begin_inset space ~
3837 \begin_inset space ~
3842 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3844 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3845 doesn't support special options you want to
3846 use for your document.
3847 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3848 -class and its options, you have to read
3852 \begin_layout Standard
3856 \begin_inset space ~
3863 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3869 \begin_inset space ~
3874 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3875 You can choose between the following five options:
3878 \begin_layout Labeling
3879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3884 Use default page style of current class.
3887 \begin_layout Labeling
3888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3893 No page numbers or headings.
3896 \begin_layout Labeling
3897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3905 \begin_layout Labeling
3906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3911 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3912 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3913 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3914 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3917 \begin_layout Labeling
3918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3923 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3924 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3930 \begin_inset Index idx
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 -packages ! fancyhdr
3941 How they are defined is explained in section
3942 \begin_inset space ~
3946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3948 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3955 \begin_layout Standard
3956 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3963 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3970 \begin_layout Subsection
3971 Paper Size and Orientation
3972 \begin_inset Index idx
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3976 Document ! Paper size
3982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3984 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3991 \begin_layout Standard
3992 You can find the following options in the menu
3995 \begin_inset space ~
4002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4006 \begin_inset Index idx
4009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4018 \begin_layout Labeling
4019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_inset space ~
4028 What size paper to print on.
4033 \begin_layout Itemize
4039 \begin_layout Itemize
4045 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Itemize
4057 \begin_layout Itemize
4060 US letter, US legal, US executive
4063 \begin_layout Itemize
4069 \begin_layout Itemize
4076 \begin_layout Labeling
4077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4082 To choose whether to output as
4093 \begin_layout Labeling
4094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4103 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4104 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4107 \begin_layout Subsection
4109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4111 name "subsec:Margins"
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 \begin_inset Index idx
4129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4138 \begin_layout Standard
4139 Paper margins are set in the menu
4141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4145 \begin_inset Index idx
4148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4157 \begin_layout Standard
4158 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4159 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4160 the paper format and the font size into account.
4163 \begin_layout Subsection
4167 \begin_layout Standard
4168 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4174 That includes the paragraph environments.
4175 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4176 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4177 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4179 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4188 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4190 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4191 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4192 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4195 \begin_layout Section
4196 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4197 \begin_inset Index idx
4200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4201 Paragraph ! Indentation
4209 \begin_layout Subsection
4211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4213 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4220 \begin_layout Standard
4221 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4222 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4225 \begin_layout Standard
4226 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4227 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4228 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4229 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4233 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4239 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4240 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4241 language than English.
4243 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4248 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4249 into \SpecialChar LyX
4251 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4254 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4256 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4257 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4258 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4265 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4266 goes to produce a printable file.
4271 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4273 gives you the ability globally to change
4277 these pre-coded spacings.
4278 We will explain more later.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4282 Paragraph Separation
4283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4285 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4290 \begin_inset Index idx
4293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4294 Paragraph ! Separation
4302 \begin_layout Standard
4310 \begin_inset space ~
4318 \begin_inset space ~
4325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4329 \begin_inset Index idx
4332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4338 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4341 \begin_layout Subsection
4345 \begin_layout Standard
4346 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4349 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4351 \begin_inset space ~
4356 dialog and toggle the
4359 \begin_inset space ~
4364 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4367 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4371 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4372 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4376 \begin_layout Standard
4377 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4378 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4381 \begin_layout Subsection
4383 \begin_inset Index idx
4386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4387 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4402 \begin_inset Index idx
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4418 \begin_inset space ~
4427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4428 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4439 -packages ! setspace
4444 installed to use this feature.
4449 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4458 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4459 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4462 \begin_layout Section
4463 Paragraph Environments
4464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4466 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4475 Paragraph ! Environments
4481 \begin_inset Index idx
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 Paragraph environments|(
4493 \begin_layout Subsection
4497 \begin_layout Standard
4498 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4501 \begin_layout Standard
4520 \begin_inset Newline newline
4523 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4525 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4526 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4527 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4536 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4540 A paragraph environment is simply a
4541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4548 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4549 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4550 scheme, labels, and so on.
4551 Additionally, you can
4552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4559 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4560 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4561 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4562 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4564 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4566 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4569 \begin_layout Standard
4570 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4571 \begin_inset Graphics
4572 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4578 at the left end of the toolbar.
4580 will change the environment of the
4584 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4585 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4586 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4599 create a new paragraph using the
4603 paragraph environment.
4605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4612 because if you are in one of these environments:
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4639 \begin_layout Itemize
4645 \begin_layout Itemize
4651 \begin_layout Itemize
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4659 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4663 , rather than resetting it to
4668 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4669 \begin_inset space ~
4673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4675 reference "sec:Nesting"
4682 \begin_layout Subsection
4686 \begin_layout Standard
4687 The default paragraph environment is
4692 It creates a plain paragraph.
4694 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4695 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4696 this manual) are in the
4703 \begin_layout Standard
4704 You can nest a paragraph using the
4708 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4716 \begin_layout Subsection
4718 \begin_inset Index idx
4721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4731 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4732 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4741 for thanks or contact information.
4742 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4743 places all of this on a separate page
4744 along with today's date.
4745 For other types of documents, the title
4746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4753 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4757 \begin_layout Standard
4759 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4773 Here's how you use them:
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 Put the title of your document in the
4784 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 Put the author name in the
4792 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4794 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4800 Note that using this environment is optional.
4801 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4802 will automatically insert today's date.
4803 If you don't want a date, use the option
4805 Suppress default date on front page
4809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4810 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4820 \begin_layout Standard
4821 You can use footnotes to insert
4822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4829 or contact information.
4832 \begin_layout Subsection
4834 \begin_inset Index idx
4837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4846 name "subsec:Headings"
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4856 takes care of the numbering for you.
4859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4865 Section headings ! Numbered
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4878 \begin_layout Enumerate
4884 \begin_layout Enumerate
4890 \begin_layout Enumerate
4896 \begin_layout Enumerate
4902 \begin_layout Enumerate
4908 \begin_layout Enumerate
4914 \begin_layout Enumerate
4920 \begin_layout Standard
4922 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4923 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4924 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4927 \begin_layout Standard
4928 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4929 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4930 You group the book into chapters.
4932 does a similar grouping:
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 is divided into either
4951 \begin_layout Itemize
4963 \begin_layout Itemize
4975 \begin_layout Itemize
4987 \begin_layout Itemize
4999 \begin_layout Itemize
5011 \begin_layout Standard
5012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5020 Not all document types use the
5024 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5029 is the top-level heading.
5037 \begin_layout Standard
5042 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5043 labels it with its number,
5044 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5046 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5060 \begin_inset Index idx
5063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5064 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5072 \begin_layout Standard
5073 The unnumbered section headings have a
5074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5081 at the end of their name.
5082 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5083 the table of contents, see section
5084 \begin_inset space ~
5088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5098 Changing the Numbering
5099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5101 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5108 \begin_layout Standard
5109 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5110 in the Table of Contents.
5111 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5113 Just as certain classes start with
5127 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5137 This is something you can change.
5140 \begin_layout Standard
5143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5147 \begin_inset Index idx
5150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5159 \begin_inset space ~
5163 \begin_inset space ~
5168 you will see two counters.
5173 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5174 numbers a section heading.
5175 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5180 Short Titles of Headings
5181 \begin_inset Index idx
5184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 Section headings ! Short titles
5191 \begin_inset Argument 1
5194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5203 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5211 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5212 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5213 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5214 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5219 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5220 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5221 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5222 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5233 This will insert a box labeled
5234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5238 \begin_inset space ~
5242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5245 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5246 This also works for captions inside floats.
5247 There can only be one short title per title.
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5254 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5259 The following information applies to all section headings:
5262 \begin_layout Itemize
5263 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5266 \begin_layout Itemize
5267 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5270 \begin_layout Itemize
5271 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5274 \begin_layout Itemize
5275 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5278 \begin_layout Subsection
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5284 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5298 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5299 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5300 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5301 the text they contain.
5302 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5310 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5313 \begin_layout Standard
5314 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5323 when you start a new paragraph.
5324 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5328 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5329 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5330 have to change back to the
5334 environment yourself.
5337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 \begin_inset Index idx
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5359 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5360 time for the differences.
5369 are identical except for one difference:
5373 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5382 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's an example of the
5399 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5401 See – no indentation!
5405 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5406 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5407 the other paragraph.
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5411 Here's another example, this time in the
5418 \begin_layout Quotation
5424 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5425 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5426 the first line, then
5430 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5434 you were quoting other text.
5437 \begin_layout Quotation
5438 Here's a new paragraph.
5439 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5440 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5443 \begin_layout Standard
5444 As the examples show,
5448 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5449 They should put quotes in the
5454 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5458 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5461 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5463 \begin_inset Index idx
5466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5473 \begin_inset Index idx
5476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5492 \begin_layout Standard
5497 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5503 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 Which I did not rehearse!
5510 It could be much worse.
5511 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5513 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5514 indented a bit more than the first.
5515 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5521 \begin_inset Newline newline
5524 And make things look fine
5525 \begin_inset Newline newline
5531 arg "newline-insert newline"
5537 \begin_layout Standard
5542 does not indent both margins.
5543 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5544 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5547 arg "newline-insert newline"
5553 \begin_layout Subsection
5555 \begin_inset Index idx
5558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5574 \begin_layout Standard
5576 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5586 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5587 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5596 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5597 lets you provide your own label.
5598 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5599 describing some general features of all four of them.
5602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_layout Standard
5607 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5609 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5610 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5619 reset the environment to
5623 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5624 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5625 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5629 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5633 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5640 \begin_layout Standard
5641 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5642 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5643 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5645 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5646 you read all of section
5647 \begin_inset space ~
5651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5653 reference "sec:Nesting"
5660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5662 \begin_inset Index idx
5665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5682 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5686 paragraph environment.
5687 It has the following properties:
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5695 \begin_layout Itemize
5697 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5706 The items can have any length.
5708 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5709 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5716 \begin_layout Itemize
5721 environment inside another
5725 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5729 \begin_layout Itemize
5730 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5735 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5738 \begin_layout Itemize
5740 \begin_inset space ~
5744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5746 reference "sec:Nesting"
5750 for a full explanation of nesting.
5754 \begin_layout Standard
5755 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5764 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5767 \begin_layout Standard
5768 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5769 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5772 \begin_layout Itemize
5773 The label for the first level
5777 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 The label for the second level is a dash.
5786 \begin_layout Itemize
5787 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5791 \begin_layout Itemize
5792 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5796 \begin_layout Itemize
5797 Back out to the third level.
5801 \begin_layout Itemize
5802 Back to the second level.
5806 \begin_layout Itemize
5807 Back to the outermost level.
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 These are the default labels for an
5816 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5821 dialog in the submenu
5826 \begin_inset Index idx
5829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5835 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5840 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5841 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5843 \begin_inset space ~
5847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5849 reference "sec:Nesting"
5856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5858 \begin_inset Index idx
5861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5870 name "sec:Enumerate"
5877 \begin_layout Standard
5882 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5883 It has these properties:
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 environment resets the counter to one.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5922 \begin_layout Enumerate
5923 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5924 Items can have any length.
5927 \begin_layout Enumerate
5928 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5931 \begin_layout Enumerate
5932 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5935 \begin_layout Enumerate
5936 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5940 \begin_layout Standard
5949 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5951 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5952 labels the four different levels in an
5959 \begin_layout Enumerate
5960 The first level of an
5964 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5978 \begin_layout Enumerate
5979 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5982 \begin_layout Enumerate
5983 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5988 \begin_layout Enumerate
5989 Back to the third level
5993 \begin_layout Enumerate
5994 Back to the second level.
5998 \begin_layout Enumerate
5999 Back to the outermost level.
6002 \begin_layout Standard
6003 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6007 environment, see section
6008 \begin_inset space ~
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6014 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6019 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6023 \begin_layout Standard
6024 There is more to nesting
6028 environments than we've stated here.
6029 You should read section
6030 \begin_inset space ~
6034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6036 reference "sec:Nesting"
6040 to learn more about nesting.
6043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6045 \begin_inset Index idx
6048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6057 \begin_layout Standard
6058 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6062 list has no fixed label.
6063 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6072 of the first line as the label.
6076 \begin_layout Description
6077 Example: This is an example of the
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6086 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6099 it is meant that the first usage of the
6103 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6105 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6113 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6119 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6121 \begin_inset space ~
6127 \begin_inset space ~
6131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6133 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6137 for more information.) Here is an example:
6140 \begin_layout Description
6142 \begin_inset space ~
6145 Example: This one shows how to use a
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6160 \begin_layout Description
6161 Usage: You should use the
6165 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6166 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6168 It's not a good idea to use a
6172 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6173 You're better off using
6185 paragraphs into them.
6188 \begin_layout Description
6189 Nesting: You can nest
6193 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6197 \begin_layout Standard
6198 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6199 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6200 them from the first line.
6203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6205 \begin_inset Index idx
6208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6217 \begin_layout Standard
6222 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6223 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6236 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6238 Here are its properties:
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6244 \begin_inset space ~
6247 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6256 of each line as the item label.
6261 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6262 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6263 space as described above.
6266 \begin_layout Labeling
6267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6268 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6269 uses different margins for the item label and the
6270 body of the item text.
6271 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6272 label width plus a little extra space.
6276 \begin_layout Labeling
6277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6279 \begin_inset space ~
6282 width \SpecialChar LyX
6283 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6284 If the label width is larger, the label
6285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6292 into the first line.
6293 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6294 margin of the rest of the item text.
6297 \begin_layout Labeling
6298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6303 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6308 environment has the same left margin.
6309 \begin_inset Newline newline
6312 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6317 \begin_inset space ~
6322 dialog (toolbar button
6325 arg "layout-paragraph"
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6337 determines the default label width.
6338 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6347 multiple times instead.
6348 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6361 \begin_inset space ~
6366 every time you alter a label in a
6371 \begin_inset Newline newline
6374 The predefined default width is the length of
6375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6383 \begin_inset space ~
6389 \begin_layout Standard
6394 list the same way as the
6398 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6404 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6408 \begin_layout Standard
6413 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6414 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6416 \begin_inset space ~
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6422 reference "sec:Nesting"
6426 to learn about nesting.
6429 \begin_layout Standard
6430 There is yet another feature of the
6434 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6435 left-justifies the item labels by
6437 You can use additional
6441 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6442 justifies the item label.
6447 are documented in section
6448 \begin_inset space ~
6452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6454 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6459 Here are some examples:
6462 \begin_layout Labeling
6463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6464 Left The default for
6471 \begin_layout Labeling
6472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6473 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6480 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6483 \begin_layout Labeling
6484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6489 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6496 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6499 \begin_layout Subsection
6501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6503 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6508 \begin_inset Index idx
6511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6520 \begin_layout Standard
6521 The features described in this section require that the module
6523 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6525 is loaded in the document settings.
6526 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6532 \begin_inset Index idx
6535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6537 -packages ! enumitem
6545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6546 Custom Enumerate Lists
6547 \begin_inset Index idx
6550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6551 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6559 \begin_layout Standard
6561 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6567 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6568 There you add the command
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6579 \begin_layout Standard
6591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6592 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6593 Code, look at section
6594 \begin_inset space ~
6598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6600 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6613 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6620 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6621 For capital Roman numerals replace
6633 in the command above.
6634 For Arabic numerals use
6642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6649 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6674 You can only number 26
6675 \begin_inset space ~
6678 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6686 \begin_layout Standard
6687 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6688 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6691 \begin_layout Standard
6692 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6695 \begin_layout Enumerate
6696 \begin_inset Argument 1
6699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6725 \begin_layout Enumerate
6726 \begin_inset Argument 1
6729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6752 \begin_layout Enumerate
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 \begin_inset Argument 1
6761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6785 \begin_layout Enumerate
6786 \begin_inset Argument 1
6789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 \begin_layout Standard
6816 For this list these commands were used:
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6830 \begin_inset Newline newline
6838 \begin_inset Newline newline
6846 \begin_inset Newline newline
6856 \begin_layout Standard
6863 makes the label emphasized and
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6882 lists until you change the definition.
6890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6892 \begin_inset Index idx
6895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6905 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6908 \begin_layout Enumerate
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6931 \begin_inset Note Note
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 goes back to default numbering
6943 \begin_layout Enumerate
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6951 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6956 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6961 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6962 to indicate that it is a resumed
6963 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6964 , but in the output.
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6976 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6985 \begin_layout Standard
6986 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6988 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6989 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6990 of a normal enumeration.
6991 There, insert the command
6994 \begin_layout Standard
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7005 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7009 \begin_layout Enumerate
7013 \begin_layout Enumerate
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7021 \begin_layout Enumerate
7022 \begin_inset Argument 1
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 This enumeration starts at 4
7044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7046 \begin_inset Index idx
7049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Standard
7059 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7061 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7064 \begin_layout Itemize
7068 \begin_layout Itemize
7069 with standard spacing
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7073 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7075 Add there the command
7079 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7082 \begin_layout Itemize
7083 \begin_inset Argument 1
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Itemize
7109 \begin_layout Itemize
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7121 \begin_inset Index idx
7124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7126 -packages ! enumitem
7132 For more information see its documentation,
7133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7143 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7145 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7146 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7150 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 \begin_inset Argument 1
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7178 \begin_layout Enumerate
7179 with negative indentation
7182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7183 Further Customization
7184 \begin_inset Index idx
7187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7188 Lists ! Customization
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 You can also change the style of description lists.
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 changes the description label font, the command
7211 \begin_layout Standard
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 sets the list style.
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 An example where the command
7225 \begin_layout Standard
7230 itshape, style=nextline
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7237 \begin_layout Description
7239 \begin_inset space ~
7243 \begin_inset Argument 1
7246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7252 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7254 itshape, style=nextline
7264 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7265 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7269 \begin_layout Description
7271 \begin_inset space ~
7274 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7275 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7276 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7279 \begin_layout Standard
7280 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7286 \begin_inset Index idx
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7291 -packages ! enumitem
7297 For more information see its documentation
7298 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7307 \begin_layout Subsection
7309 \begin_inset Index idx
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7323 \begin_inset space ~
7326 Address: An Overview
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7330 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7331 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7339 \begin_inset space ~
7345 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7346 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7347 gags on the document.
7348 In contrast, you can use the
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7360 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7361 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 Of course, you're not limited to using
7373 \begin_inset space ~
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7387 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7388 some European academic papers.
7391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7395 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7407 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7408 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7412 \begin_inset space ~
7417 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7418 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7419 Here's an example of each:
7422 \begin_layout Right Address
7424 \begin_inset Newline newline
7428 \begin_inset Newline newline
7432 \begin_inset Newline newline
7435 When is it? What is today?
7438 \begin_layout Standard
7442 \begin_inset space ~
7448 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7450 the largest block of text on a single line.
7451 Here's an example of the
7458 \begin_layout Address
7460 \begin_inset Newline newline
7463 Where do I send this
7464 \begin_inset Newline newline
7467 Your post office and country
7470 \begin_layout Standard
7471 As you can see, both
7478 \begin_inset space ~
7483 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7488 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7489 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7495 This makes sense, since
7503 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7504 Thus, you have to use
7511 arg "newline-insert newline"
7516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7517 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7523 \begin_inset space ~
7528 ) to start a new line in an
7535 \begin_inset space ~
7543 \begin_layout Subsection
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7548 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7549 or list of references.
7551 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7556 \begin_inset Index idx
7559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7573 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7574 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7575 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7576 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7590 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7591 The book document classes ignores the
7595 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7599 in a letter document class.
7602 \begin_layout Standard
7607 environment does several things for you.
7608 First, it puts the centered label
7609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7617 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7619 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7620 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7621 the subsequent text.
7622 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7624 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7628 \begin_layout Standard
7629 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7633 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7634 The new paragraph will still be in the
7639 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7640 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7643 \begin_layout Standard
7644 \begin_inset Float figure
7649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7651 \begin_inset Graphics
7652 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7660 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7665 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7687 We would love to demonstrate the
7691 environment, but since this document is in the
7692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7699 class, we can't do this.
7700 We inserted it therefore as figure
7701 \begin_inset space ~
7705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7707 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7712 If you have never heard of an
7713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7720 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7725 \begin_inset Index idx
7728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7737 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7749 environment is used to list references.
7750 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7751 only use it at the end of the document.
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7764 When you first open a
7768 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7769 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7785 depending on the document class.
7786 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7787 Each paragraph of the
7791 environment is a bibliography entry.
7796 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7797 Each new paragraph is still in the
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7806 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7808 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7810 handling, have a look at section
7811 \begin_inset space ~
7815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7817 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7824 \begin_layout Subsection
7825 Special Environments
7828 \begin_layout Standard
7830 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7831 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7839 \begin_inset Index idx
7842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7852 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7859 \begin_layout Standard
7865 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7867 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7872 key as a fixed whitespace.
7876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_inset space ~
7894 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7908 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7911 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7914 arg "newline-insert newline"
7931 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7932 So, when you finish using the
7937 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7938 Also, you can nest the
7943 environment inside of others.
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7947 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7950 \begin_layout Itemize
7954 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7962 \begin_inset space \space{}
7972 arg "newline-insert newline"
7978 \begin_layout Itemize
7982 arg "newline-insert newline"
7992 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7998 \begin_layout Itemize
7999 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8000 You must put at least one
8004 in any line you want blank.
8005 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8009 \begin_layout Itemize
8010 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8014 since that will insert
8019 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8022 arg "self-insert \""
8028 \begin_layout Standard
8032 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8044 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8048 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8049 printf("Hello World!
8054 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8063 This is just the standard
8064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8075 \begin_layout Standard
8081 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8083 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8084 as if you used a typewriter.
8085 \begin_inset Index idx
8088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8089 Paragraph environments|)
8094 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8097 Program Code Listings
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8114 \begin_inset Index idx
8117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8126 \begin_layout Standard
8131 environment is similar to the
8136 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8137 computer console text.
8142 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8156 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8157 you can have empty lines.
8170 \begin_layout Itemize
8171 have a certain language and a text style
8174 \begin_layout Itemize
8175 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8176 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8177 and \SpecialChar TeX
8181 \begin_layout Standard
8182 Because of these properties
8186 works like a typewriter.
8190 \begin_layout Verbatim
8194 \begin_layout Verbatim
8197 The following 2 lines are empty:
8200 \begin_layout Verbatim
8204 \begin_layout Verbatim
8208 \begin_layout Verbatim
8209 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8214 \begin_layout Section
8215 Nesting Environments
8216 \begin_inset Index idx
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Nesting ! Environments
8226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8235 \begin_layout Subsection
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8241 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8243 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8245 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8247 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 \begin_layout Enumerate
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8268 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8277 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8282 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8283 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8299 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8308 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8310 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8313 arg "depth-increment"
8319 arg "depth-decrement"
8333 arg "depth-increment"
8339 arg "depth-decrement"
8343 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8344 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8348 \begin_layout Standard
8349 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8350 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8351 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8352 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8353 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8357 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8359 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8361 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8364 \begin_layout Subsection
8365 What You Can and Can't Nest
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8369 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8370 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8373 \begin_layout Standard
8374 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8375 than a simple yes or no.
8376 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8380 Completely unnestable
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8393 \begin_layout Standard
8394 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8395 environments have them:
8398 \begin_layout Description
8399 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8400 Can't nest into them.
8404 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8416 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8428 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Description
8437 \begin_inset space ~
8440 Nestable You can nest them.
8441 You can nest other things into them.
8445 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8481 \begin_layout Itemize
8487 \begin_layout Itemize
8494 \begin_layout Itemize
8501 \begin_layout Description
8502 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8503 You can't nest anything into them.
8507 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_inset space ~
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Standard
8603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8611 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8624 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8625 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8626 nested section headings violate this.
8634 \begin_layout Subsection
8635 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8636 \begin_inset Index idx
8639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8648 \begin_layout Standard
8649 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8650 affected by nesting anyhow.
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8676 Figures and tables in
8680 are not affected by this.
8685 Have a look at section
8686 \begin_inset space ~
8690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8692 reference "sec:Floats"
8696 for more information about
8703 \begin_layout Standard
8705 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8706 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8710 \begin_layout Standard
8711 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8719 of its own, it behaves just like a
8720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8727 paragraph environment.
8728 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8733 Here's an example with a table:
8736 \begin_layout Enumerate
8741 \begin_layout Enumerate
8742 This is (a) and it's nested.
8746 \begin_layout Standard
8747 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8753 \begin_layout Standard
8755 \begin_inset Tabular
8756 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8757 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8758 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8853 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8857 \begin_layout Enumerate
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8862 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 \begin_layout Enumerate
8871 This is (a) and it's nested.
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 \begin_inset Tabular
8885 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8886 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8887 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8888 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8979 \begin_layout Enumerate
8986 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8993 \begin_layout Standard
8994 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8998 \begin_layout Standard
8999 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9002 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9005 \begin_layout Enumerate
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9011 This is (a) and it's nested.
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset Tabular
9024 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9025 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9026 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9027 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9112 \begin_layout Standard
9113 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9119 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9128 \begin_layout Enumerate
9132 \begin_layout Standard
9133 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9139 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9140 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9144 \begin_layout Subsection
9145 Usage and General Features
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9150 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9159 is the innermost possible depth.
9160 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 level #1 – outermost
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Itemize
9188 \begin_layout Itemize
9197 \begin_layout Standard
9198 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9199 both of them in the example.
9200 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9210 For example, if we tried to nest another
9215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9222 , we would get errors.
9225 \begin_layout Subsection
9227 \begin_inset Index idx
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9239 \begin_layout Standard
9240 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9241 We have several examples of nested environments.
9242 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9247 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9250 \begin_layout Labeling
9251 \labelwidthstring MMM
9252 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9261 \begin_layout Labeling
9262 \labelwidthstring MMM
9263 #2-a This is level #2.
9264 We created it by using
9267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9273 arg "depth-increment"
9280 \begin_layout Labeling
9281 \labelwidthstring MMM
9282 #3-a This is level #3.
9283 This time, we just enter
9290 arg "depth-increment"
9294 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9298 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9304 arg "depth-increment"
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9316 environment, nested inside of
9317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9325 So, it's at level #4.
9326 We did this by entering
9329 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9335 arg "depth-increment"
9338 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9343 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9359 \begin_layout Standard
9364 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9367 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9373 \begin_layout Labeling
9374 \labelwidthstring MMM
9375 #4-a This is level #4.
9379 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9382 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9387 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9391 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9396 keep nesting things inside
9397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9408 \begin_layout Labeling
9409 \labelwidthstring MMM
9410 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9415 \begin_layout Labeling
9416 \labelwidthstring MMM
9417 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9418 and this is level #6.
9419 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9423 \begin_layout Labeling
9424 \labelwidthstring MMM
9425 #5-b Back to level #5.
9429 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9435 arg "depth-decrement"
9442 \begin_layout Labeling
9443 \labelwidthstring MMM
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-decrement"
9456 , we're back at level #4.
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-b Back to level #3.
9463 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9467 \begin_layout Labeling
9468 \labelwidthstring MMM
9469 #2-b Back to level #2.
9474 \begin_layout Labeling
9475 \labelwidthstring MMM
9476 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9477 After this sentence, we will enter
9481 and change the paragraph environment back to
9488 \begin_layout Standard
9489 We could have also used the
9505 environment in place of the
9510 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9514 Example 2: Inheritance
9517 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9518 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9519 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9522 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9531 arg "depth-increment"
9535 \begin_inset Newline newline
9538 which, we will change to the
9546 \begin_layout Enumerate
9551 environment, at level #2.
9554 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 Notice how the nested
9559 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9564 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9568 \begin_layout Standard
9569 We ended this example by entering
9574 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9578 and reset the nesting depth by using
9581 arg "depth-decrement"
9587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9588 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9597 \begin_inset Argument 1
9600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9601 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9609 \begin_layout Enumerate
9610 This is level #1, in an
9614 paragraph environment.
9615 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9619 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-increment"
9634 Now, what happens if we nest an
9638 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9639 label be? An asterisk?
9643 \begin_layout Itemize
9653 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9654 So, its label is a bullet.
9655 (We got here by using
9658 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9664 arg "depth-increment"
9667 , then changing the environment to
9675 \begin_layout Itemize
9676 Here's level #4, produced using
9679 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9685 arg "depth-increment"
9689 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9694 \begin_layout Enumerate
9697 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9702 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9706 , because we are in the
9714 environment (that is, it is an
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9735 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9739 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9743 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9746 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9753 arg "depth-decrement"
9756 to decrease the depth after the next
9759 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9773 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9776 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9781 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9790 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9795 reset the counter for the label.
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9803 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9809 arg "depth-decrement"
9812 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9813 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9814 into the twofold-nested
9822 \begin_layout Enumerate
9823 The same thing happens if we do another
9826 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9832 arg "depth-decrement"
9835 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9838 \begin_layout Standard
9839 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9844 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9859 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9866 The same rule applies for the
9870 environment, as well.
9873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9874 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9879 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9880 the same detail with how we did it.
9889 \begin_layout Standard
9897 arg "depth-increment"
9904 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9905 the example in parentheses someplace.
9906 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9907 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9908 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9922 Now we will add verse.
9923 \begin_inset Newline newline
9926 It will get much worse.
9927 \begin_inset Newline newline
9937 arg "depth-increment"
9948 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9949 \begin_inset Newline newline
9952 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9953 \begin_inset Newline newline
9959 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9972 \begin_layout Standard
9973 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9979 \begin_layout Standard
9981 \begin_inset Tabular
9982 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9983 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9985 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10070 \begin_layout Verse
10074 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10084 arg "depth-increment"
10090 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 arg "depth-decrement"
10111 \begin_layout Enumerate
10116 : level #1) This is another item.
10117 Note that selecting a
10121 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10122 3 times to put the table inside the
10130 \begin_layout Quotation
10131 We're now ending the
10135 list and changing to
10140 We're still at level #1.
10141 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10142 The next set of paragraphs is a
10143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10150 We will nest both the
10157 \begin_inset space ~
10162 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10166 for the letter body.
10170 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10173 to preserve the depth.
10174 Remember that you need to use
10177 arg "newline-insert newline"
10180 to create multiple lines inside the
10187 \begin_inset space ~
10197 \begin_layout Right Address
10199 \begin_inset Newline newline
10202 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10203 \begin_inset Newline newline
10209 \begin_layout Address
10211 \begin_inset space ~
10217 \begin_layout Quotation
10218 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10222 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10223 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10224 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10225 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10226 as soon as possible.
10227 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10230 \begin_layout Quotation
10231 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10232 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10233 with your order, along with payment.
10236 \begin_layout Quotation
10237 We thank you again for your patience.
10240 \begin_layout Address
10242 \begin_inset Newline newline
10249 \begin_layout Quotation
10250 That ends that example!
10253 \begin_layout Standard
10254 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10255 gives you a lot of power with just
10257 We could have easily nested an
10278 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10281 \begin_layout Subsection
10283 \begin_inset Index idx
10286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10287 Nesting ! Separation
10293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10295 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10302 \begin_layout Standard
10303 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10305 For example you need two different enumerations:
10308 \begin_layout Enumerate
10313 \begin_layout Enumerate
10318 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 \begin_layout Standard
10323 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10329 \begin_layout Itemize
10335 \begin_layout Standard
10336 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Standard
10355 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10356 list item and use the menu
10358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10359 Start New Environment
10362 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10364 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10367 arg "paragraph-break"
10371 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10372 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10373 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10374 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10377 \begin_layout Standard
10378 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10381 arg "paragraph-break"
10384 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10387 \begin_layout Section
10388 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10389 \begin_inset Index idx
10392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10401 \begin_layout Standard
10402 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10403 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10405 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10406 be broken at the end of a line.
10407 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10411 \begin_layout Subsection
10413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10415 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10420 \begin_inset Index idx
10423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10432 \begin_layout Standard
10433 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10434 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10435 ) not to break the line at
10437 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10440 \begin_layout Quote
10441 Further documentation is given in section
10442 \begin_inset Newline newline
10446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10448 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10456 \begin_layout Standard
10457 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10472 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10481 A protected space is set with
10483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10484 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10486 \begin_inset space ~
10494 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10500 \begin_layout Subsection
10502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10504 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10509 \begin_inset Index idx
10512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10513 Spacing ! Horizontal
10521 \begin_layout Standard
10522 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10525 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10529 The length units are listed in Appendix
10530 \begin_inset space ~
10534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10536 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10547 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10552 \begin_inset Index idx
10555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10556 Spaces ! Inter-word
10564 \begin_layout Standard
10565 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10566 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10567 at the ends of sentences.
10568 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10569 automatically takes care about this.
10570 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10571 followed by a period; see section
10572 \begin_inset space ~
10576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10578 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10583 To insert a normal space, select
10585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10586 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10588 \begin_inset space ~
10596 arg "space-insert normal"
10602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10606 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10611 \begin_inset Index idx
10614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 \begin_layout Standard
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10632 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10641 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10642 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10643 inside abbreviations:
10646 \begin_layout Quote
10648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10652 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10655 \begin_layout Standard
10656 or between values and units.
10657 Compare for example this:
10658 \begin_inset Newline newline
10662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10666 \begin_inset Newline newline
10669 10 kg (normal space
10672 \begin_layout Standard
10673 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10678 \begin_inset space ~
10686 arg "space-insert thin"
10692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10696 \begin_layout Standard
10697 You can also insert the following space types:
10700 \begin_layout Description
10702 \begin_inset space ~
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10709 space A line with a
10710 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10714 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10718 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10721 negative thin space between the arrows.
10724 \begin_layout Description
10726 \begin_inset space ~
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10733 space A line with a
10734 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10738 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10742 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10745 negative medium space between the arrows.
10748 \begin_layout Description
10750 \begin_inset space ~
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10757 space A line with a
10758 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10762 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10769 negative thick space between the arrows.
10772 \begin_layout Description
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10782 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10786 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10790 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10794 \begin_inset space ~
10798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10801 em) space between the arrows.
10804 \begin_layout Description
10806 \begin_inset space ~
10810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10814 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10818 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10822 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10826 \begin_inset space ~
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 em) space between the arrows.
10836 \begin_layout Description
10838 \begin_inset space ~
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10850 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10854 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10858 \begin_inset space ~
10862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10865 em) space between the arrows.
10868 \begin_layout Description
10870 \begin_inset space ~
10874 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10878 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10883 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10890 cm space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Standard
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10901 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10905 lists the different space sizes.
10908 \begin_layout Standard
10909 \begin_inset Float table
10914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10915 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10920 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10924 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10934 \begin_inset Tabular
10935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11213 \begin_inset Index idx
11216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 \begin_layout Standard
11226 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11227 feature for adding extra space
11228 in a uniform fashion.
11229 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11230 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11231 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11232 equally between themselves.
11235 \begin_layout Standard
11236 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11239 \begin_layout Quote
11241 This is on the left side
11242 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11245 This is on the right
11248 \begin_layout Quote
11251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11261 \begin_layout Quote
11264 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11278 \begin_layout Standard
11279 That was an example in the
11285 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11289 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11296 is one in a standard paragraph.
11297 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11301 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11304 \begin_layout Standard
11305 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11308 \begin_inset space ~
11313 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11318 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11322 \begin_inset space ~
11328 \begin_layout Standard
11330 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11334 \begin_inset space ~
11340 \begin_layout Standard
11342 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11346 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_layout Standard
11354 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11358 \begin_inset space ~
11364 \begin_layout Standard
11366 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11370 \begin_inset space ~
11376 \begin_layout Standard
11378 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11388 \begin_layout Standard
11389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11397 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11401 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11403 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11404 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11408 option in the space dialog.
11416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11420 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11425 \begin_inset Index idx
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11439 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11442 \begin_layout Standard
11443 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11446 What is correct English?:
11447 \begin_inset Newline newline
11451 \begin_inset Newline newline
11455 \begin_inset space ~
11458 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11459 \begin_inset Newline newline
11463 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11474 \begin_inset Newline newline
11478 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11489 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11497 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11502 \begin_inset space ~
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11514 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11517 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11521 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11538 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11547 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11548 That is why it is named
11549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11557 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11558 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11562 \begin_layout Subsection
11564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11566 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11571 \begin_inset Index idx
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 \begin_layout Standard
11584 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11587 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11589 \begin_inset space ~
11595 There you find the following sizes:
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11611 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11612 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11617 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11620 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11622 \begin_inset space ~
11628 \begin_inset Index idx
11631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 Document ! Settings
11637 for the paragraph separation.
11638 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11655 \begin_inset Index idx
11658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11665 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11670 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11671 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11680 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11689 s are described in section
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11696 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11705 If there are several
11709 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11710 You can therefore use
11714 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11717 \begin_layout Standard
11722 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11723 \begin_inset space ~
11727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11729 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11736 \begin_layout Standard
11737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11747 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11748 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11760 \begin_layout Subsection
11761 Paragraph Alignment
11762 \begin_inset Index idx
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11766 Paragraph ! Alignment
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11775 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11780 dialog (toolbar button
11783 arg "layout-paragraph"
11787 There are five possibilities:
11790 \begin_layout Itemize
11798 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11804 \begin_layout Itemize
11812 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11818 \begin_layout Itemize
11826 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11832 \begin_layout Itemize
11840 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11846 \begin_layout Itemize
11854 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11860 \begin_layout Standard
11861 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11862 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11863 the left and right margins.
11864 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11867 \begin_layout Standard
11869 This paragraph is right aligned,
11872 \begin_layout Standard
11874 this one is centered,
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11879 this one is left aligned.
11882 \begin_layout Subsection
11884 \begin_inset Index idx
11887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11888 Page breaks ! Forced
11894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11896 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11904 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11905 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11906 force a page break where you want one.
11907 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11908 is good at page breaking.
11909 Only if you use a lot of
11913 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11914 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11919 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11923 have to change the page breaking.
11926 \begin_layout Standard
11927 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11929 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11934 \begin_inset space ~
11940 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11942 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11943 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11945 \begin_inset space ~
11950 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11952 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11953 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11956 \begin_layout Standard
11957 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11958 at the top of a page.
11959 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11961 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11962 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11963 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11967 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11971 to learn more about
11978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11982 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11987 \begin_inset Index idx
11990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11991 Page breaks ! Clear
11999 \begin_layout Standard
12000 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12001 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12002 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12003 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12004 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12007 \begin_layout Standard
12008 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12011 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12013 \begin_inset space ~
12019 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12022 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12024 \begin_inset space ~
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12033 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12034 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12037 \begin_layout Subsection
12039 \begin_inset Index idx
12042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12051 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12059 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12061 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12066 \begin_inset space ~
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12078 arg "newline-insert newline"
12082 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12085 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12087 \begin_inset space ~
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12099 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12102 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12104 This is useful to avoid
12105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12112 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12117 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12119 very good at line breaking.
12120 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12121 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12122 \begin_inset space ~
12126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12128 reference "sec:Quote"
12133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12135 reference "sec:Verse"
12140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12142 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12149 \begin_layout Subsection
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12153 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12158 \begin_inset Index idx
12161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12170 \begin_layout Standard
12172 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12188 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12190 \begin_inset space ~
12195 you can insert horizontal lines.
12196 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12197 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12198 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12201 \begin_layout Standard
12203 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12214 \begin_layout Section
12215 Characters and Symbols
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12220 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12221 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12229 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12233 for information on how this is done.
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12242 dialog via the menu
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12260 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12261 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12263 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12271 \begin_layout Section
12272 Fonts and Text Styles
12273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12275 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12282 \begin_layout Subsection
12284 \begin_inset Index idx
12287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 There are two types of fonts:
12300 \begin_layout Description
12302 \begin_inset space ~
12306 \begin_inset Index idx
12309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12315 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12320 characters) in the font.
12321 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12322 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12323 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12324 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12325 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12326 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12327 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12328 \begin_inset Newline newline
12331 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12332 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12333 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12334 sizes than at small ones.
12335 \begin_inset Newline newline
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12357 \begin_layout Description
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12363 \begin_inset Index idx
12366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12372 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12373 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12374 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12375 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12376 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12377 image manipulation program.
12378 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12379 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12383 pixels high up to 34
12384 \begin_inset space ~
12387 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12388 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12389 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12391 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12392 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12393 \begin_inset Newline newline
12396 Bitmap fonts are named
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12404 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12407 \begin_layout Standard
12408 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12409 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12410 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12411 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12412 use scalable fonts.
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12421 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12422 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12423 font to emphasize text, you use an
12424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12432 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12434 In \SpecialChar LyX
12435 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12439 \begin_layout Subsection
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12451 \begin_layout Standard
12452 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12453 used its own fonts.
12454 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12455 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12458 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12459 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12460 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12461 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12462 to a word processor.
12463 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12464 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12465 files are very portable across
12466 different machines.
12467 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 has increased a lot
12469 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12472 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12480 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12485 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12486 code in the document
12487 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12490 \begin_layout Standard
12491 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12492 engines that are also able directly
12493 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12495 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12497 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12499 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12500 that is installed on your system.
12501 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12504 \begin_layout Standard
12505 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12513 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12514 es; so you might have to experiment.
12522 \begin_layout Standard
12523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12532 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12533 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12534 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12535 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12544 \begin_layout Subsection
12545 Document Font and Font size
12546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12548 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12553 \begin_inset Index idx
12556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 You can set the document fonts in the
12578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_inset Index idx
12585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12586 Document ! Settings
12596 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12597 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12600 \begin_inset space ~
12609 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12611 \begin_inset space ~
12614 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12617 \begin_layout Standard
12624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12633 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12634 This requires that you use
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12679 as the output format, i.
12680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12684 \begin_inset space \space{}
12687 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12688 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12689 installed (see section
12690 \begin_inset space ~
12694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12696 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12701 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12703 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12704 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12706 \begin_inset space ~
12709 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12710 cannot determine the family.
12711 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12712 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12715 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12718 \begin_layout Standard
12719 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12720 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12725 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12731 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12732 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12740 \begin_inset space ~
12746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12759 European Computer Modern
12762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12769 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12772 \begin_layout Standard
12781 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12782 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12787 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12795 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12801 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12802 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12805 \begin_layout Itemize
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12814 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12827 \begin_inset space ~
12832 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12833 community in order to replace
12837 as the default font.
12838 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12839 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12842 \begin_inset space ~
12855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12856 One difference is improved kerning.
12864 \begin_layout Itemize
12868 \begin_inset space ~
12872 \begin_inset space ~
12877 fonts in (the rare) case that
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12885 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12900 Virtual means that it
12901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12912 -glyphs from other fonts.
12913 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12935 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12941 \begin_inset Index idx
12944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12946 -packages ! aeguill
12951 with the document preamble line
12952 \begin_inset Newline newline
12959 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12960 \begin_inset Newline newline
12965 will fix the guillemet problem.
12970 and that accented characters are not
12974 glyph, but built of
12978 characters, the accent and the letter.
12979 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12985 If you search for example for the French word
12986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12993 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 and not for the glyph
13003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13017 \begin_layout Itemize
13018 If you do not like the look of
13026 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13031 \begin_inset space ~
13037 \begin_inset space ~
13047 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13048 \begin_inset space ~
13051 serif and typewriter fonts,
13055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13056 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13063 \begin_inset space ~
13072 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13077 \begin_inset space \space{}
13085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13089 \begin_inset space \space{}
13095 \begin_inset space ~
13103 \begin_inset space ~
13113 but you can also select your own.
13114 \begin_inset Newline newline
13117 The differences between roman,
13120 \begin_inset space ~
13129 fonts are explained in section
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13136 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13141 \begin_inset Newline newline
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13152 was originally designed for newspapers.
13153 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13154 into the small newspaper columns.
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13163 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13167 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13180 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13185 depends on the class you are using.
13186 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13189 \begin_layout Standard
13190 Note that the font size is the
13195 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13196 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13197 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13198 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13207 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13214 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13221 \begin_layout Standard
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13230 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13235 serif or typewriter.
13240 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13250 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13271 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13272 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13278 \begin_inset Index idx
13281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13283 -packages ! fontenc
13289 \begin_inset space ~
13293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13295 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13300 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13301 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13308 \begin_layout Standard
13309 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13311 Use Old Style Figures
13315 Use True Small Caps
13318 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13321 Use Old Style Figures
13323 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13325 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13333 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13337 Use True Small Caps
13339 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13340 of scaled capitals.
13341 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13342 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13345 \begin_layout Standard
13350 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13351 a font to display the script characters.
13355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13356 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13362 \begin_inset Index idx
13365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13372 So this has no effect for the document language
13386 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13398 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13403 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13404 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13406 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13411 dialog, see section
13412 \begin_inset space ~
13416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13418 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13430 \begin_layout Subsection
13434 \begin_layout Standard
13435 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13436 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13438 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13439 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13440 choose a math font in the dialog
13442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13446 \begin_inset Index idx
13449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 Document ! Settings
13456 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13457 automatically selects a math font.
13458 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13459 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13468 \begin_inset space ~
13474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13479 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13480 document font is available.
13483 \begin_layout Standard
13484 Note that the math font will not be used for
13488 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13494 or by the insertion of the command
13501 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13506 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13507 while the math characters do not.
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13512 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13515 \begin_inset space ~
13523 \begin_inset space ~
13528 in the document font settings.
13531 \begin_layout Standard
13532 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13533 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13534 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13535 font (in most cases
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13551 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13552 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13572 \begin_layout Subsection
13573 Using Different Character Styles
13574 \begin_inset Index idx
13577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13584 \begin_inset Index idx
13587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13596 \begin_layout Standard
13597 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13598 automatically changes the character style for certain
13599 paragraph environments.
13601 supports two character styles,
13610 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13614 \begin_layout Standard
13619 style, do one of the following:
13622 \begin_layout Itemize
13623 click on the toolbar button
13632 \begin_layout Itemize
13633 use the key binding
13642 \begin_layout Standard
13643 These commands are all toggles.
13648 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13651 \begin_layout Standard
13652 One typically uses the
13656 style for proper names.
13658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13673 \begin_layout Standard
13674 A more widely used character style is the
13679 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13686 \begin_layout Itemize
13687 clicking on the toolbar button
13696 \begin_layout Itemize
13697 using the keybindings
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13713 use a different font.
13716 \begin_layout Standard
13717 We've been using the
13721 style all over the place in this document.
13722 Here's one more example:
13725 \begin_layout Quotation
13728 Do not overuse character styles!
13731 \begin_layout Standard
13732 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13733 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13734 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13735 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13740 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13750 \begin_inset space ~
13753 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13759 arg "dialog-show character"
13765 \begin_layout Subsection
13766 Fine-Tuning with the
13771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13773 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13778 \begin_inset Index idx
13781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13790 \begin_layout Standard
13791 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13793 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13794 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13795 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13796 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13797 from ordinary dialog.
13800 \begin_layout Standard
13801 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13802 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13803 \begin_inset Newline newline
13806 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13807 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 To use custom character styles, open the
13813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13815 \begin_inset space ~
13818 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13821 dialog or press the toolbar button
13824 arg "dialog-show character"
13828 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13829 font property that you can choose.
13830 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13838 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13843 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13844 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13845 environments all at once.
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13849 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13852 \begin_inset space ~
13864 \begin_layout Labeling
13865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13879 The possible options are:
13883 \begin_layout Labeling
13884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13889 This is the Roman font family.
13890 Normally a serif font.
13891 It's also the default family.
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13906 \begin_inset space ~
13913 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13925 \begin_layout Labeling
13926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13933 This is the Typewriter font family.
13939 arg "font-typewriter"
13948 \begin_layout Labeling
13949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 This corresponds to the print weight.
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13965 This is the Medium font series.
13966 It's also the default series.
13969 \begin_layout Labeling
13970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13977 This is the Bold font series.
13990 \begin_layout Labeling
13991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13996 As the name implies.
14001 \begin_layout Labeling
14002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14007 This is the Upright font shape.
14008 It's also the default shape.
14011 \begin_layout Labeling
14012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14026 s the Italic font shape
14032 \begin_layout Labeling
14033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14040 This is the Slanted font shape
14042 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14043 , this is different from italic).
14046 \begin_layout Labeling
14047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14051 \begin_inset space ~
14058 This is the Small caps font shape
14065 \begin_layout Labeling
14066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14071 Alters the text color.
14072 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14076 \begin_inset space ~
14081 , which means that the document default color set in
14083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14084 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14090 \begin_inset space ~
14095 is used, you can choose between
14128 \begin_inset Index idx
14131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14140 \begin_layout Labeling
14141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14146 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14147 the language of the document.
14148 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14149 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14151 \begin_inset Newline newline
14154 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14156 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14157 When using the spell checking (see section
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14164 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14168 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14171 \begin_layout Labeling
14172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14177 Alters the size of the font.
14178 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14179 proportional to the document font size.
14180 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14181 the details, but a general description of what
14187 \begin_layout Labeling
14188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14209 arg "font-size tiny"
14215 \begin_layout Labeling
14216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14237 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14243 \begin_layout Labeling
14244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14265 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14271 \begin_layout Labeling
14272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14293 arg "font-size small"
14299 \begin_layout Labeling
14300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14314 It's also the default size.
14318 arg "font-size normal"
14324 \begin_layout Labeling
14325 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14346 arg "font-size large"
14352 \begin_layout Labeling
14353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14374 arg "font-size larger"
14380 \begin_layout Labeling
14381 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14402 arg "font-size largest"
14408 \begin_layout Labeling
14409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14430 arg "font-size huge"
14436 \begin_layout Labeling
14437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14458 arg "font-size giant"
14464 \begin_layout Labeling
14465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14470 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14490 arg "font-size increase"
14496 \begin_layout Labeling
14497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14502 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14522 arg "font-size decrease"
14529 \begin_layout Standard
14534 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14535 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14537 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14538 — use those instead.
14539 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14542 \begin_layout Labeling
14543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14548 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14553 \begin_layout Labeling
14554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14561 This is text with emphasize on
14564 This might seem like the same as
14568 , but it is actually a bit different.
14574 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14576 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14579 \begin_layout Labeling
14580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14587 This is text with Underbar on.
14593 arg "font-underline"
14599 \begin_inset Newline newline
14604 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14605 when you could not change fonts.
14606 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14607 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14608 because some people
14612 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14615 \begin_layout Labeling
14616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14620 \begin_inset space ~
14627 This is text with Double underbar on.
14633 arg "font-underunderline"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14640 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14641 about double underbar.
14644 \begin_layout Labeling
14645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14649 \begin_inset space ~
14656 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14662 arg "font-underwave"
14666 \begin_inset Newline newline
14669 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14670 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14673 \begin_layout Labeling
14674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14681 This is text with Strikeout on.
14687 arg "font-strikeout"
14691 \begin_inset Newline newline
14694 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14695 changed in the meantime.
14698 \begin_layout Labeling
14699 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14706 This is text with Noun on.
14713 , this is a logical attribute.
14714 Normally it's equivalent to
14717 \begin_inset space ~
14726 \begin_layout Standard
14727 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14728 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14730 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14732 \begin_inset space ~
14735 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14741 arg "dialog-show character"
14744 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14745 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14748 arg "textstyle-apply"
14752 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14756 \begin_layout Standard
14757 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14764 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14765 (suppose you just set the shape to
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14784 \begin_inset space ~
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14797 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14805 \begin_inset space ~
14817 \begin_layout Itemize
14823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14830 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14848 \begin_inset Newline newline
14852 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14866 \begin_inset Note Note
14869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14870 For more on phantoms see section
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14877 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14887 \begin_inset Newline newline
14893 \begin_layout Itemize
14898 fonts use characters with serifs.
14899 These are the small
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14907 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14908 The following example shows the difference:
14909 \begin_inset Newline newline
14913 \begin_inset Newline newline
14918 text without serifs
14921 \begin_inset Newline newline
14924 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14925 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14932 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14938 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14939 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14942 \begin_layout Standard
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14951 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14959 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14960 the property to be removed.
14961 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14962 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14963 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14982 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14994 \begin_inset space ~
14999 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15010 If you, for example, set
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 \begin_inset space ~
15034 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15046 \begin_layout Standard
15047 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15048 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15051 \begin_layout Section
15052 Printing and Previewing
15055 \begin_layout Subsection
15059 \begin_layout Standard
15060 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15061 using \SpecialChar LyX
15062 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15063 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15064 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15065 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15067 Additional Features
15072 \begin_layout Standard
15074 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15077 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15078 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15079 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15083 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15084 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15085 to turn your writing into printable output.
15086 This happens in two stages:
15089 \begin_layout Enumerate
15090 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15091 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15093 a file with the extension,
15094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 \begin_layout Enumerate
15109 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15110 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15111 to use the commands in the
15115 file to produce printable output.
15118 \begin_layout Subsection
15119 Output file formats
15120 \begin_inset Index idx
15123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15132 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15140 Simple text (ASCII)
15141 \begin_inset Index idx
15144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15145 File formats ! ASCII
15153 \begin_layout Standard
15154 This file type has the extension
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15167 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15171 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15178 \begin_layout Standard
15179 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15181 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15182 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15190 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15191 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15192 bibliography (section
15193 \begin_inset space ~
15197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15199 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15204 If your document includes such material, use
15206 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15207 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15209 \begin_inset space ~
15213 \begin_inset space ~
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15229 \begin_inset space ~
15235 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15236 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15242 \begin_inset Index idx
15245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15246 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15255 \begin_layout Standard
15256 This file type has the extension
15257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15268 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15271 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15272 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15273 -Errors or to process it manually
15274 with console commands.
15275 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15276 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15277 's temporary directory whenever you
15278 view or export your document.
15281 \begin_layout Standard
15282 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15283 -file using the menu
15285 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15286 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15301 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15302 export variants are explained in section
15303 \begin_inset space ~
15307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15309 reference "subsec:Export"
15316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15318 \begin_inset Index idx
15321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15330 \begin_layout Standard
15331 This file type has the extension
15332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15352 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15353 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15354 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15358 \begin_layout Standard
15359 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15360 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15361 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15362 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15363 when you view the DVI.
15364 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15367 \begin_layout Standard
15368 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15370 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15371 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15376 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15377 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 The latter option uses the program
15398 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15404 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15407 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15408 font access (see section
15409 \begin_inset space ~
15413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15415 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15420 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15421 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15428 \begin_inset Index idx
15431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15432 File formats ! PostScript
15440 \begin_layout Standard
15441 This file type has the extension
15442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15454 PostScript was developed by the company
15458 as a printer language.
15459 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15461 PostScript can be seen as a
15462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 programming language
15466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15469 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15474 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15481 \begin_inset Index idx
15484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15486 -packages ! pstricks
15496 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15499 \begin_layout Standard
15500 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15504 Encapsulated PostScript
15505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15508 (EPS, file extension
15509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15521 As \SpecialChar LyX
15522 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15523 convert them in the background to EPS.
15524 If, for example, you have 50
15525 \begin_inset space ~
15528 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15530 \begin_inset space ~
15533 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15534 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15536 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15537 EPS to avoid this problem.
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15543 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15544 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15552 \begin_inset Index idx
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15562 \begin_inset Index idx
15565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15574 \begin_layout Standard
15575 This file type has the extension
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15592 Portable Document Format
15593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15600 was derived from PostScript.
15601 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15610 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15611 looks exactly the same.
15614 \begin_layout Standard
15615 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 (JPG, file extension
15624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15651 Portable Network Graphics
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 (PNG, file extension
15656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15668 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15669 converts them in the
15670 background to one of these formats.
15671 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15672 will slow down your workflow.
15673 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15676 \begin_layout Standard
15677 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15679 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15685 \begin_layout Description
15687 \begin_inset space ~
15690 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15694 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15697 \begin_layout Description
15699 \begin_inset space ~
15706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15713 X) This uses the program
15715 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15718 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15721 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15724 is a new engine, derived from
15728 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15729 access (see section
15730 \begin_inset space ~
15734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15736 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15741 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15742 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15747 \begin_layout Description
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15763 X) This uses the program
15768 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15774 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15775 font access (see section
15776 \begin_inset space ~
15780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15782 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15787 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15788 vertically written Japanese.
15791 \begin_layout Description
15793 \begin_inset space ~
15796 (cropped) This is the same as
15799 \begin_inset space ~
15804 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15805 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15806 to generate good-looking
15807 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15810 \begin_layout Description
15812 \begin_inset space ~
15815 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15819 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15823 \begin_layout Description
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15828 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15832 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15833 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15837 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15838 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15841 \begin_layout Standard
15845 \begin_inset space ~
15854 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15855 works without problems.
15856 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15857 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15861 \begin_inset space ~
15868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15896 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15906 \begin_inset Index idx
15909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15910 FileFormats ! XHTML
15916 \begin_inset Index idx
15919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15928 \begin_layout Standard
15929 This file type has the extension
15930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15942 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15943 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15944 When \SpecialChar LyX
15945 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15946 suitable for the purpose.
15947 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15953 between different formats, which are described in section
15955 Math Output in XHTML
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15968 \begin_layout Standard
15969 XHTML output remains
15970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15977 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15978 features are supported yet.
15982 and the World Wide Web
15986 Additional Features
15988 manual, for more information.
15991 \begin_layout Standard
15992 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15994 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15995 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16002 \begin_layout Subsection
16004 \begin_inset Index idx
16007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16016 \begin_layout Standard
16017 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16018 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16027 or use the toolbar button
16034 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16035 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16042 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16046 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16054 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16059 Further output formats can be selected via
16061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16062 View (Other Formats)
16064 or the toolbar button
16065 \begin_inset Graphics
16066 filename ../images/view-others.png
16068 groupId toolbarbuttons
16075 \begin_layout Standard
16076 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16077 viewer window using the menu
16079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16085 Update (Other Formats)
16090 \begin_layout Standard
16091 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16094 To have a real output, export your document.
16097 \begin_layout Section
16098 A few Words about Typography
16099 \begin_inset Index idx
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16111 \begin_layout Subsection
16112 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16113 \begin_inset Index idx
16116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16123 \begin_inset Index idx
16126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16135 \begin_layout Standard
16136 In \SpecialChar LyX
16138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16149 character comes in four lengths: the
16161 , and the minus sign:
16162 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16168 \begin_layout Standard
16169 \begin_inset Tabular
16170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16172 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16173 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16174 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16204 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16244 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16271 \begin_inset space ~
16274 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16281 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16308 \begin_inset space ~
16311 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16332 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16372 \begin_layout Standard
16373 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16385 character multiple times in a row.
16386 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16387 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 \begin_layout Standard
16421 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16422 math mode and has a length of its own.
16423 Here are some examples:
16426 \begin_layout Enumerate
16427 line- and page-breaks
16428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16438 \begin_layout Enumerate
16440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16450 \begin_layout Enumerate
16451 Oh — there's a dash.
16452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16462 \begin_layout Enumerate
16463 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16477 \begin_layout Subsection
16479 \begin_inset Index idx
16482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16491 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16498 \begin_layout Standard
16499 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16500 but automatically in the output.
16501 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16507 \begin_inset Index idx
16510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16517 following the rules of the document language.
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16522 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16526 font and with unusual constructs, like
16527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16535 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16536 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16537 This is done with the menu
16539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16540 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16548 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16550 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16554 \begin_layout Standard
16555 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16556 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16567 would then see the hyphen
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16575 as a hyphenation possibility.
16576 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16577 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16578 as described in section
16579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16582 Prevent Hyphenation
16583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16589 \begin_inset space ~
16597 \begin_layout Subsection
16599 \begin_inset Index idx
16602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16612 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16615 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16622 \begin_layout Standard
16623 When \SpecialChar LyX
16624 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16627 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16633 appropriate amount of space.
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16637 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16639 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16640 gets after another word.
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16645 not work in all cases.
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16659 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16662 \begin_layout Standard
16663 Here are some examples of
16667 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16670 \begin_layout Itemize
16675 \begin_layout Itemize
16680 \begin_layout Standard
16681 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16684 \begin_layout Itemize
16686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16690 this is too much space!
16693 \begin_layout Itemize
16698 \begin_layout Standard
16699 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16702 \begin_layout Standard
16703 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16706 \begin_layout Enumerate
16710 \begin_inset space ~
16715 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16722 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16727 \begin_inset Index idx
16730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16731 Spaces ! inter-word
16739 \begin_layout Enumerate
16743 \begin_inset space ~
16748 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16749 \begin_inset space ~
16753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16755 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16760 \begin_inset Index idx
16763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16772 \begin_layout Enumerate
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16780 \begin_inset space ~
16784 \begin_inset space ~
16791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16793 \begin_inset space ~
16798 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16799 This function is also bound to
16802 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16808 \begin_layout Standard
16809 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16812 \begin_layout Itemize
16814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16818 \begin_inset space \space{}
16821 this is too much space!
16824 \begin_layout Itemize
16825 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16831 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16833 will take care of this.
16836 \begin_layout Standard
16837 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16847 feature described in the section
16849 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16854 Additional Features
16859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16861 \begin_inset Index idx
16864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16865 Typography ! Quotes
16871 \begin_inset Index idx
16874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16907 usually sets quotes correctly.
16908 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16909 and use a closing quote at the end.
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16919 The keyboard character,
16923 , generates this automatically.
16926 \begin_layout Standard
16927 You can specify what character the
16931 key produces using the submenu
16937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16941 \begin_inset Index idx
16944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16945 Document ! Settings
16955 There are six choices:
16958 \begin_layout Labeling
16959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16982 \begin_layout Labeling
16983 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16986 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16990 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16996 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17000 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17006 \begin_layout Labeling
17007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17010 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17014 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17020 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17024 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17030 \begin_layout Labeling
17031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17034 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17038 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17044 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17048 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17054 \begin_layout Labeling
17055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17058 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17062 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17068 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17072 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17078 \begin_layout Labeling
17079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17082 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17086 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17092 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17096 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17106 arg "quote-insert single"
17112 \begin_layout Subsection
17114 \begin_inset Index idx
17117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 Typography ! Ligatures
17124 \begin_inset Index idx
17127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17158 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17165 \begin_layout Standard
17166 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17167 print them as single characters.
17168 These groups are known as
17173 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17174 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17176 Here are the standard ligatures:
17179 \begin_layout Itemize
17183 \begin_layout Itemize
17187 \begin_layout Itemize
17191 \begin_layout Itemize
17195 \begin_layout Itemize
17199 \begin_layout Standard
17200 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17203 \begin_layout Standard
17204 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17205 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17229 To break a ligature, use
17231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17232 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17234 \begin_inset space ~
17241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17252 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17269 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 \begin_layout Subsection
17280 \begin_inset Index idx
17283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17293 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17300 \begin_layout Standard
17301 You will certainly have noticed that the word “\SpecialChar LaTeX
17302 ” always appears with characters
17303 in different sizes and positions.
17305 is the name of the program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17306 and is therefore recognized as a proper
17307 name when you type it in \SpecialChar LyX
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17328 \begin_inset Note Note
17331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17332 The braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17333 Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper name
17334 in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17339 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! \SpecialChar LyX
17340 recognizes the following
17344 \begin_layout Description
17346 The name of the game, write
17347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17368 \begin_layout Description
17370 The program used by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17393 \begin_layout Description
17395 The program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17418 \begin_layout Description
17419 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17420 The actual version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 \begin_layout Standard
17444 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17450 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17458 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17459 -world to give programs geek version numbers.
17460 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17461 converges to the number
17462 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17465 : The actual version is
17466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17474 , the previous one was
17475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17488 you can insert two empty braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17490 In \SpecialChar LyX
17491 this will look like
17492 \begin_inset Graphics
17493 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17499 \begin_inset Newline newline
17502 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17510 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17517 \begin_layout Subsection
17519 \begin_inset Index idx
17522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17532 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17533 space between two words.
17534 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17544 for units use the menu
17546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17547 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17549 \begin_inset space ~
17557 arg "space-insert thin"
17563 \begin_layout Standard
17564 Here is an example to show the differences:
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17568 \begin_inset Tabular
17569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17570 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17571 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17579 \begin_inset space ~
17583 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17595 space between number and unit
17602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17611 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17623 half space between number and unit
17636 \begin_layout Subsection
17638 \begin_inset Index idx
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17653 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17654 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17655 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17656 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17657 These bits of text became known as
17668 \begin_layout Standard
17669 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17670 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17671 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17672 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17673 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17674 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17675 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17676 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17677 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17678 \begin_inset Newline newline
17686 \begin_inset Newline newline
17694 \begin_inset Newline newline
17697 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17698 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17699 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17701 \begin_inset space ~
17705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17707 key "latexcompanion"
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17722 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17723 's page break mechanism.
17726 \begin_layout Chapter
17727 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17730 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17737 \begin_layout Standard
17738 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17741 \begin_inset space ~
17747 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17750 \begin_layout Section
17752 \begin_inset Index idx
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17771 \begin_layout Standard
17773 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17776 \begin_layout Description
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17782 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17783 \begin_inset Newline newline
17787 \begin_inset Note Note
17790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17791 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17799 \begin_layout Description
17800 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17801 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17802 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17805 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17806 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 \begin_inset space ~
17825 \begin_inset Newline newline
17829 \begin_inset Note Comment
17832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17833 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17842 \begin_layout Description
17844 \begin_inset space ~
17847 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17848 set in the document settings under
17850 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17852 \begin_inset space ~
17858 \begin_inset Newline newline
17862 \begin_inset Newline newline
17866 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17875 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17876 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17881 of a comment that appears in the output.
17887 \begin_inset Newline newline
17891 \begin_inset Newline newline
17894 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17897 \begin_layout Standard
17898 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17910 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17913 \begin_layout Section
17915 \begin_inset Index idx
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17927 name "sec:Footnotes"
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17936 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17942 or the toolbar button
17945 arg "footnote-insert"
17957 \begin_inset Graphics
17958 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17967 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17968 's representation of your footnote.
17978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17997 label, the box will
18001 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18002 Clicking on the box label again will close
18015 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18016 and click on the footnote
18031 \begin_layout Standard
18032 Here is an example footnote:
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18041 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18050 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18051 position where the footnote box is placed.
18052 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18053 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18054 according to the document class.
18056 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18057 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18063 ey are described in the
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18074 \begin_layout Section
18076 \begin_inset Index idx
18079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18088 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18096 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18098 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18107 or the toolbar button
18110 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 appearing within your text.
18137 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18138 's representation of your margin
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18152 \begin_inset Marginal
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18157 This is a marginal note.
18165 \begin_layout Standard
18166 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18167 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18168 pages, right on odd pages.
18171 \begin_layout Standard
18172 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18175 \begin_inset space ~
18183 \begin_inset space ~
18191 \begin_layout Section
18192 Graphics and Images
18193 \begin_inset Index idx
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18203 \begin_inset Index idx
18206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18215 name "sec:Graphics"
18222 \begin_layout Standard
18223 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18224 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18227 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18236 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18239 \begin_layout Standard
18240 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18245 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18246 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18248 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18249 \begin_inset space ~
18253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18255 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18262 \begin_layout Standard
18267 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18268 of the image in the output.
18269 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18273 \begin_inset space ~
18277 \begin_inset space ~
18286 \begin_inset space ~
18290 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset space ~
18299 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18300 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18308 \begin_layout Standard
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18323 \begin_inset space ~
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18344 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18346 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18351 \begin_inset space ~
18356 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18357 with the image size is printed.
18361 \begin_inset space ~
18365 \begin_inset space ~
18369 \begin_inset space ~
18374 is explained in the
18377 \begin_inset space ~
18389 \begin_layout Standard
18390 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18391 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18393 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18396 \begin_layout Standard
18398 \begin_inset Graphics
18399 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18407 \begin_layout Standard
18408 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18409 the image into a float, see section
18410 \begin_inset space ~
18414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18416 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18423 \begin_layout Subsection
18425 \begin_inset Index idx
18428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18437 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18444 \begin_layout Standard
18445 You can insert images in any known file format.
18446 But as we explained in section
18447 \begin_inset space ~
18451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18453 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18457 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18459 therefore uses the program
18463 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18464 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18465 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18466 \begin_inset space ~
18470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18472 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18479 \begin_layout Standard
18480 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18483 \begin_layout Description
18485 \begin_inset space ~
18488 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18489 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18490 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18494 Graphics Interchange Format
18495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18498 (GIF, file extension
18499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18511 \begin_inset Index idx
18514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18546 Portable Network Graphics
18547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18550 (PNG, file extension
18551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18563 \begin_inset Index idx
18566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18598 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18602 (JPG, file extension
18603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18627 \begin_inset Index idx
18630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 \begin_layout Description
18663 \begin_inset space ~
18666 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18668 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18669 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18670 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18671 \begin_inset Newline newline
18674 Scalable image formats can be
18675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18678 Scalable Vector Graphics
18679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18682 (SVG, file extension
18683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18695 \begin_inset Index idx
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18730 Encapsulated PostScript
18731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18734 (EPS, file extension
18735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18747 \begin_inset Index idx
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18782 Portable Document Format
18783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18786 (PDF, file extension
18787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18799 \begin_inset Index idx
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18817 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18818 result will not be scalable.
18819 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18833 \begin_layout Standard
18834 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18841 \begin_layout Subsection
18842 Grouping of Image Settings
18843 \begin_inset Index idx
18846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18847 Images ! Settings grouping
18855 \begin_layout Standard
18856 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18858 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18859 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18861 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18862 need to manually change each of them.
18866 \begin_layout Standard
18867 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18870 \begin_inset space ~
18874 \begin_inset space ~
18889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 \begin_inset space ~
18901 \begin_inset space ~
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18919 and checking the name of the desired group.
18922 \begin_layout Section
18924 \begin_inset Index idx
18927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18943 \begin_layout Standard
18944 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18947 arg "tabular-insert"
18952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18956 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18957 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18958 from the rest of the table.
18959 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18960 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18962 Here is an example table:
18965 \begin_layout Standard
18967 \begin_inset Tabular
18968 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18969 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18970 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18971 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18972 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18973 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 \begin_layout Subsection
19177 \begin_layout Standard
19178 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19181 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19185 This brings up the table dialog.
19186 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19187 cursor is placed currently.
19188 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19189 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19190 done on all of your selection.
19193 \begin_layout Standard
19194 In addition to the table dialog, the
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19202 helps you in setting table properties.
19203 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19206 \begin_layout Standard
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19215 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19216 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19217 current cell respectively.
19218 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19220 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19221 of text, see section
19222 \begin_inset space ~
19226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19228 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19235 \begin_layout Standard
19236 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19237 using the check box
19246 This will merge the cells to
19250 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19251 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19252 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19253 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19254 in the last row without the upper border:
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19259 \begin_inset Tabular
19260 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19261 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19262 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19263 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19264 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19265 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19285 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19361 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 \begin_layout Standard
19397 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19398 -arguments for the table.
19399 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19400 explained in the chapter
19407 \begin_inset space ~
19413 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19414 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19415 but are visible in the output.
19418 \begin_layout Standard
19419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19427 Most DVI-viewers are
19431 able to display rotations.
19439 \begin_layout Standard
19444 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19449 adds lines for all cell borders.
19452 \begin_layout Subsection
19454 \begin_inset Index idx
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 Tables ! Longtables
19464 \begin_inset Index idx
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 \begin_layout Standard
19477 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19480 \begin_inset space ~
19484 \begin_inset space ~
19493 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19494 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19497 \begin_layout Description
19502 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19503 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19504 except for the first page, if
19507 \begin_inset space ~
19515 \begin_layout Description
19519 \begin_inset space ~
19524 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19525 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19528 \begin_layout Description
19533 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19534 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19535 except for the last page, if
19538 \begin_inset space ~
19546 \begin_layout Description
19550 \begin_inset space ~
19555 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19556 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19559 \begin_layout Description
19560 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19561 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19567 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19570 \begin_inset space ~
19578 \begin_layout Standard
19579 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19580 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19581 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19587 In this context, first means first in this order:
19590 \begin_inset space ~
19602 \begin_inset space ~
19607 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19610 \begin_layout Standard
19612 \begin_inset Tabular
19613 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19614 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19615 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19616 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19617 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19618 <row endfirsthead="true">
19619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19630 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <row endfirsthead="true">
19650 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19670 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <row endhead="true">
19683 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <row endhead="true">
19714 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <row endfoot="true">
19747 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19767 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21357 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21481 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 <row endlastfoot="true">
21729 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21749 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 \begin_layout Subsection
21768 \begin_inset Index idx
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21780 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21787 \begin_layout Standard
21788 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21789 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21790 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21791 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21795 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21798 \begin_layout Standard
21799 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21800 for the column in the table dialog.
21801 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21802 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21806 \begin_layout Standard
21808 \begin_inset Tabular
21809 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21810 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21812 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21813 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 This is longer now.
21963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22015 This is longer now.
22020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 \begin_layout Standard
22047 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22048 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22053 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22054 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22060 Selection with the mouse or with
22064 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22065 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22066 the selection from outside the table.
22069 \begin_layout Section
22071 \begin_inset Index idx
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22090 \begin_layout Subsection
22094 \begin_layout Standard
22095 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22096 have a fixed location.
22098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22105 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22113 \begin_inset space ~
22118 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22119 too many notes on the current page.
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22123 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22124 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22125 and pages without text.
22126 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22127 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22128 Floats are therefore numbered.
22129 Referencing is described in section
22130 \begin_inset space ~
22134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22136 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22143 \begin_layout Standard
22144 To insert a float, use the menu
22146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22150 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22151 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22153 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22154 \begin_inset Index idx
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22164 paragraph within the float.
22165 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22166 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22167 left-clicking on the box label.
22168 A closed float box looks like this:
22169 \begin_inset Graphics
22170 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
22175 – a gray button with a red label.
22178 \begin_layout Standard
22179 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22181 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22184 \begin_layout Subsection
22186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22188 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22193 \begin_inset Index idx
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 Floats ! Figure floats
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22207 \begin_inset space ~
22211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22213 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22217 was created using the menu
22219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22220 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22226 arg "float-insert figure"
22230 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22239 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22243 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22244 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22248 \begin_inset space ~
22256 arg "layout-paragraph"
22262 \begin_layout Standard
22263 \begin_inset Float figure
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_inset Graphics
22271 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22286 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22290 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22303 \begin_layout Standard
22304 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22305 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22316 ) and refer to it using the menu
22318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22324 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22328 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22329 vague references like
22330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22337 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22338 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22348 For more about cross-references, see section
22349 \begin_inset space ~
22353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22355 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22362 \begin_layout Standard
22363 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22364 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22365 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22366 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22367 as described in section
22368 \begin_inset space ~
22372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22374 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22380 \begin_inset space ~
22384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22386 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22390 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22391 You can also set the images one below the other.
22393 \begin_inset space ~
22397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22399 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22406 reference "fig:Platypus"
22410 are the subfigures.
22413 \begin_layout Standard
22414 \begin_inset Float figure
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22424 \begin_inset Float figure
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22435 name "fig:Undefinable"
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 \begin_inset Graphics
22449 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22464 \begin_inset Float figure
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22475 name "fig:Platypus"
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 \begin_inset Graphics
22489 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22501 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22513 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22517 Two distorted images.
22530 \begin_layout Subsection
22532 \begin_inset Index idx
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 Floats ! Table floats
22544 \begin_layout Standard
22545 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22548 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22551 or the toolbar button
22554 arg "float-insert table"
22558 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22559 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22560 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22562 \begin_inset space ~
22566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22568 reference "tab:Table-float"
22575 \begin_layout Standard
22576 \begin_inset Float table
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22587 name "tab:Table-float"
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 \begin_inset Tabular
22602 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22603 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22733 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22757 \end{array}\right]$
22765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22799 \begin_layout Subsection
22801 \begin_inset Index idx
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22813 \begin_layout Standard
22815 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22816 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22817 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22819 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22827 \begin_inset space ~
22835 \begin_layout Section
22837 \begin_inset Index idx
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 \begin_layout Standard
22851 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22853 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22854 \begin_inset space \space{}
22861 \begin_layout Standard
22862 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22863 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22869 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22870 and its alignment within the page.
22873 \begin_layout Standard
22875 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22885 height_special "totalheight"
22890 backgroundcolor "none"
22893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 This is a minipage.
22897 The text is set in an italic style.
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22904 another formatting.
22912 \begin_layout Standard
22913 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22916 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22920 as described in section
22921 \begin_inset space ~
22925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22927 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22932 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22938 \begin_layout Standard
22939 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22949 height_special "totalheight"
22954 backgroundcolor "none"
22957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22959 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22965 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22969 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22979 height_special "totalheight"
22984 backgroundcolor "none"
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22988 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22989 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22997 \begin_layout Standard
22998 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23004 \begin_layout Standard
23005 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23007 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23014 \begin_inset space ~
23022 \begin_layout Chapter
23023 Mathematical Formulas
23024 \begin_inset Index idx
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 \begin_inset Index idx
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23068 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23075 \begin_layout Standard
23076 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23081 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23084 \begin_layout Section
23086 \begin_inset Index idx
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 \begin_layout Standard
23099 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23112 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23114 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23115 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23116 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23124 \begin_layout Standard
23125 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23129 \begin_inset space ~
23134 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23137 \begin_layout Standard
23138 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23139 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23142 \begin_layout Standard
23143 This is a line with an inline formula
23144 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23150 \begin_layout Standard
23151 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23152 paragraph, like this one:
23153 \begin_inset Formula
23160 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23163 \begin_layout Standard
23165 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23167 For example, typing
23168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23181 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23182 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23186 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23189 \begin_inset space ~
23197 \begin_layout Subsection
23198 Navigating in Formulas
23199 \begin_inset Index idx
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 \begin_layout Standard
23212 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23213 achieved with the arrow keys.
23215 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23216 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23221 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23222 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23226 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23230 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23233 \end{array}\right]$
23241 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23246 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23247 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23250 \begin_layout Standard
23255 , printed in this document as
23256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23260 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23267 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23268 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23269 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23274 For example, if you want
23275 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23283 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23297 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23302 , since in the latter case only the
23305 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23310 will be under the square root sign:
23311 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23317 \begin_layout Standard
23318 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23320 \begin_inset Formula
23322 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23331 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23332 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23335 \begin_layout Subsection
23339 \begin_layout Standard
23340 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23341 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23345 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23346 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23347 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23348 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23349 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23353 \begin_layout Subsection
23354 Exponents and Subscripts
23355 \begin_inset Index idx
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 \begin_inset Index idx
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 \begin_layout Standard
23378 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23381 arg "math-superscript"
23387 arg "math-subscript"
23390 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23392 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23395 , type in a formula
23398 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23408 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23414 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23418 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23424 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23430 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23439 , you have to use an extra
23443 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23444 For example, if you want
23445 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23451 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23457 Subscripts are similar: To get
23458 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23464 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23472 \begin_layout Subsection
23474 \begin_inset Index idx
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 \begin_layout Standard
23487 Create a fraction either with the command
23493 or by using the icon
23496 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23502 \begin_inset space ~
23508 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23509 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23510 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23515 To move back up, press
23520 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23521 \begin_inset Formula
23523 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23526 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23534 \begin_layout Subsection
23536 \begin_inset Index idx
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 \begin_layout Standard
23549 Roots can be created using the
23552 \begin_inset space ~
23560 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23566 arg "math-insert \\root"
23588 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23594 always produces a square root.
23597 \begin_layout Subsection
23598 Operators with Limits
23599 \begin_inset Index idx
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 \begin_inset Index idx
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23621 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23628 \begin_layout Standard
23630 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23634 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23637 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23638 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23639 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23640 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23641 The sum operator will automatically place its
23642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23649 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23651 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23655 \begin_inset Formula
23657 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23662 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23666 \begin_layout Standard
23667 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23669 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23670 behind the operator and using the menu
23672 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23673 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23675 \begin_inset space ~
23679 \begin_inset space ~
23693 \begin_layout Standard
23694 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23703 \begin_inset Index idx
23706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 \begin_inset Formula
23715 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23720 which will place the
23721 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23733 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23734 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23740 \begin_layout Standard
23741 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23748 Have a look at section
23749 \begin_inset space ~
23753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23755 reference "subsec:Functions"
23759 for an explanation of function macros.
23762 \begin_layout Subsection
23764 \begin_inset Index idx
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23776 \begin_layout Standard
23777 Most math symbols can be found in the
23780 \begin_inset space ~
23785 under one of several categories; including
23802 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23806 \begin_layout Standard
23807 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23808 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23809 don't have to use the
23812 \begin_inset space ~
23817 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23819 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23822 \begin_layout Subsection
23824 \begin_inset Index idx
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23836 \begin_layout Standard
23837 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23843 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23849 \begin_inset space ~
23857 arg "math-insert \\space"
23861 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23862 For example, the sequence
23867 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23870 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23872 \begin_inset Graphics
23873 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23878 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23879 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23880 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23881 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23882 , because they are negative
23884 Here are two examples:
23887 \begin_layout Standard
23897 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23903 \begin_layout Standard
23913 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23919 \begin_layout Subsection
23921 \begin_inset Index idx
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23933 name "subsec:Functions"
23940 \begin_layout Standard
23944 \begin_inset space ~
23949 contains under the button
23952 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23955 a number of function macros, such as
23956 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23960 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23968 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23975 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23976 avoid confusions, because
23977 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23981 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23987 \begin_layout Standard
23988 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23990 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23994 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24000 \begin_layout Standard
24001 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24002 are placed, as described in section
24003 \begin_inset space ~
24007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24009 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24016 \begin_layout Subsection
24018 \begin_inset Index idx
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 \begin_layout Standard
24031 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24033 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24034 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24035 commands, for example, to enter
24036 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24039 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24040 Our example is entered by typing
24045 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24052 \begin_inset space ~
24056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24058 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24062 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24065 \begin_layout Standard
24066 \begin_inset Float table
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24072 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24077 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24081 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 \begin_inset Tabular
24092 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24093 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24504 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24612 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24682 \begin_inset space ~
24690 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24693 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24697 \begin_layout Section
24698 Brackets and Delimiters
24699 \begin_inset Index idx
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24709 \begin_inset Index idx
24712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24721 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24728 \begin_layout Standard
24729 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24731 For some purposes, using just the keys
24736 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24737 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24738 toolbar delimiter icon
24741 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24745 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24746 \begin_inset Formula
24748 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24756 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24757 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24761 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24764 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24770 \begin_inset Formula
24772 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24781 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24782 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24786 \begin_layout Standard
24787 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24788 left side and right side.
24789 If you use the option
24792 \begin_inset space ~
24797 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24798 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24800 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24805 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24806 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24809 \begin_layout Standard
24810 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24811 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24812 is to go inside the brackets.
24813 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24818 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24819 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24820 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24824 arg "math-delim ( )"
24830 \begin_layout Section
24831 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24832 \begin_inset Index idx
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24842 \begin_inset Index idx
24845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 \begin_inset Index idx
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24864 \begin_layout Standard
24865 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24869 \begin_inset space ~
24877 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24881 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24882 Here is an example:
24883 \begin_inset Formula
24885 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24894 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24895 \begin_inset space ~
24899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24901 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24906 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24907 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24908 This alignment is set in the box
24913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24962 for every column as default.
24963 For example, the sequence
24964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24975 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24976 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24977 corresponds to the relevant column.
24978 The result will look like this:
24979 \begin_inset Formula
24982 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24983 column & has & has\,right\\
24984 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24993 \begin_layout Standard
24994 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24997 arg "newline-insert newline"
25000 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25001 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25003 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25006 or the math toolbar.
25009 \begin_layout Standard
25010 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25011 It can be created with the menu
25013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25014 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25028 Here is an example:
25029 \begin_inset Formula
25043 \begin_layout Standard
25044 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25047 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25050 arg "newline-insert newline"
25054 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25059 arg "newline-insert newline"
25062 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25070 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25071 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25072 A new row is created by every further entry of
25075 arg "newline-insert newline"
25079 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25080 Here is an example:
25081 \begin_inset Formula
25083 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25084 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25089 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25090 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25091 \begin_inset Formula
25093 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25101 \begin_layout Standard
25102 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25109 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25110 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25113 reference "eq:asquared"
25118 The other types are described in section
25119 \begin_inset space ~
25123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25125 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25132 \begin_layout Section
25133 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25134 \begin_inset Index idx
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 Math ! Formula numbering
25144 \begin_inset Index idx
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 Math ! Referencing formulas
25154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25156 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25163 \begin_layout Standard
25164 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25166 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25167 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25169 \begin_inset space ~
25173 \begin_inset space ~
25181 arg "math-number-toggle"
25185 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25186 within parentheses.
25187 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25188 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25189 the document class.
25190 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25191 separated by a dot:
25192 \begin_inset Formula
25202 arg "math-number-toggle"
25205 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25206 You can only number displayed formulas.
25209 \begin_layout Standard
25210 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25212 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25213 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25215 \begin_inset space ~
25219 \begin_inset space ~
25227 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25230 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25231 \begin_inset Formula
25234 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25240 To number all lines use the shortcut
25243 arg "math-number-toggle"
25249 \begin_layout Standard
25250 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25253 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25254 A label is inserted with the menu
25256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25265 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25266 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25267 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25279 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25280 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25281 We inserted in the following example the label
25282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25289 in the second line:
25290 \begin_inset Formula
25292 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25293 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25298 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25299 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25300 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25304 \begin_inset space ~
25312 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25316 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25317 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25318 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25319 as the formula number:
25322 \begin_layout Standard
25323 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25326 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25333 \begin_layout Standard
25334 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25335 's cross-reference box are described in section
25336 \begin_inset space ~
25340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25342 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25347 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25355 \begin_layout Section
25356 User defined math macros
25357 \begin_inset Index idx
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 \begin_layout Standard
25371 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25372 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25373 Math macros are explained in section
25376 \begin_inset space ~
25388 \begin_layout Section
25392 \begin_layout Subsection
25394 \begin_inset Index idx
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 \begin_layout Standard
25407 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25408 To set a font in a formula, use the
25411 \begin_inset space ~
25419 arg "math-insert \\font"
25422 , or enter its command, listed in table
25423 \begin_inset space ~
25427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25429 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25436 \begin_layout Standard
25437 \begin_inset Float table
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25448 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25452 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 \begin_inset Tabular
25463 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25464 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25465 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25466 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25525 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25552 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25673 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25700 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 \begin_layout Standard
25735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25743 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25759 \begin_layout Standard
25760 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25761 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25766 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25767 space when you need a space in the box.
25768 Here is an example where
25769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25780 denotes the set of numbers:
25781 \begin_inset Formula
25783 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25791 \begin_layout Standard
25792 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25793 You can, for example, put a character in
25802 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25806 \begin_inset Newline newline
25809 So it is better not to use this feature.
25812 \begin_layout Standard
25813 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25814 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25818 \begin_inset Newline newline
25821 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25827 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25828 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25841 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25844 \begin_layout Standard
25845 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25847 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25848 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25850 \begin_inset space ~
25858 \begin_layout Subsection
25860 \begin_inset Index idx
25863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25872 \begin_layout Standard
25873 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25875 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25879 \begin_inset space ~
25883 \begin_inset space ~
25891 \begin_inset space ~
25899 arg "math-insert \\font"
25903 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25904 in black instead of blue.
25905 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25906 Here is an example:
25907 \begin_inset Formula
25910 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25911 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25920 \begin_layout Subsection
25922 \begin_inset Index idx
25925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25934 \begin_layout Standard
25935 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25936 automatically chosen in most situations.
25954 For most characters,
25962 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25963 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25968 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25969 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25970 thinks are appropriate.
25971 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25974 arg "math-insert \\style"
25978 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25979 For example, you can set
25980 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25983 , which is normally in
25992 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25996 The four styles are used in the following example:
25999 \begin_layout Standard
26000 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26004 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26008 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26012 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26018 \begin_layout Standard
26019 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26020 is set in a particular size with the menu
26022 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26024 \begin_inset space ~
26029 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26030 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26031 will be adjusted to correspond.
26032 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26043 \begin_layout Standard
26047 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26053 \begin_layout Section
26054 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26056 \begin_inset Index idx
26059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26066 \begin_inset Index idx
26069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 \begin_layout Standard
26080 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26081 that are in common use.
26084 \begin_layout Subsection
26085 Enabling AMS-Support
26088 \begin_layout Standard
26089 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26090 the document by selecting the checkbox
26093 \begin_inset space ~
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26101 \begin_inset space ~
26108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26112 \begin_inset Index idx
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 Document ! Settings
26124 \begin_inset space ~
26130 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26131 -errors in formulas,
26132 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26135 \begin_layout Subsection
26137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26139 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26144 \begin_inset Index idx
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26156 \begin_layout Standard
26157 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26158 provides a selection of different formula types.
26160 allows you to choose between
26181 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26188 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26191 \begin_layout Chapter
26195 \begin_layout Section
26197 \begin_inset Index idx
26200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26209 name "sec:Cross-References"
26216 \begin_layout Standard
26217 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26218 's strengths is cross-references.
26219 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26221 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26222 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26223 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26226 \begin_layout Enumerate
26230 \begin_layout Enumerate
26231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26233 name "enu:Second-item"
26240 \begin_layout Enumerate
26244 \begin_layout Standard
26245 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26250 or by pressing the toolbar button
26257 A gray label box like this:
26258 \begin_inset Graphics
26259 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26264 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26266 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26301 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26302 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26318 \begin_layout Standard
26319 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26324 or the toolbar button
26327 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26331 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26332 \begin_inset Graphics
26333 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26338 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26340 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26353 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26357 \begin_layout Standard
26358 As an alternative to
26360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26363 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26368 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26369 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26371 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26383 \begin_layout Standard
26384 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26391 reference "enu:Second-item"
26398 \begin_layout Standard
26399 It is recommended to use a protected space
26403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 described in section
26405 \begin_inset space ~
26409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26411 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26420 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26421 line breaks between them.
26424 \begin_layout Standard
26425 There are six formats of cross-references:
26428 \begin_layout Description
26429 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26432 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26439 \begin_layout Description
26440 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26441 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26453 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26460 \begin_layout Description
26461 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26462 \begin_inset space ~
26466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26467 LatexCommand pageref
26468 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26475 \begin_layout Description
26477 \begin_inset space ~
26481 \begin_inset space ~
26484 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26486 LatexCommand vpageref
26487 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26492 \begin_inset Newline newline
26495 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26496 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26497 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26498 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26499 it prints “on the next page”.
26500 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26503 \begin_layout Description
26505 \begin_inset space ~
26509 \begin_inset space ~
26513 \begin_inset space ~
26516 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26519 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26524 \begin_inset Newline newline
26527 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26533 ; otherwise it behaves like
26537 \begin_inset space ~
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26550 \begin_layout Description
26552 \begin_inset space ~
26555 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26556 \begin_inset Newline newline
26560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26578 \begin_inset Index idx
26581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26583 -packages ! prettyref
26589 \begin_inset Index idx
26592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 -packages ! refstyle
26605 \begin_inset Newline newline
26608 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26609 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26612 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26625 is the default and preferred because
26629 supports only English documents.
26630 The format is specified by using the command
26642 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26643 preamble of the document.
26644 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26657 ) can be done with this command
26658 \begin_inset Newline newline
26665 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26670 \begin_inset Newline newline
26673 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26677 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26684 \begin_layout Description
26686 \begin_inset space ~
26689 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26691 LatexCommand nameref
26692 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26701 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26703 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26707 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 You can only use the style
26716 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26720 is always possible.
26723 \begin_layout Standard
26724 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26725 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26727 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26728 \begin_inset space ~
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26734 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26741 \begin_layout Standard
26742 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26746 \begin_inset space ~
26750 \begin_inset space ~
26755 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26756 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26759 \begin_inset space ~
26764 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26765 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26768 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26774 \begin_layout Standard
26775 You can change labels at any time.
26776 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26777 do not need to think about this.
26780 \begin_layout Standard
26781 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26783 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26787 \begin_layout Standard
26788 References are described in detail in the section
26789 \begin_inset space ~
26793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26803 \begin_inset space ~
26811 \begin_layout Section
26812 Table of Contents and other Listings
26813 \begin_inset Index idx
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 \begin_inset Index idx
26826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26842 \begin_layout Subsection
26844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26846 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26857 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26859 \begin_inset space ~
26863 \begin_inset space ~
26869 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26871 If you click on it, the
26875 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26876 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26877 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26879 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26881 \begin_inset space ~
26886 that is described in section
26887 \begin_inset space ~
26891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26893 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26900 \begin_layout Standard
26901 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26902 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26904 \begin_inset space ~
26908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26910 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26914 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26916 \begin_inset space ~
26920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26922 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26926 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26928 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26931 \begin_layout Subsection
26932 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26935 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26942 \begin_layout Standard
26943 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26945 You can insert them via the
26947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26951 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26954 \begin_layout Section
26955 URLs and Hyperlinks
26956 \begin_inset Index idx
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 \begin_inset Index idx
26969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 \begin_layout Subsection
26980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26989 \begin_layout Standard
26990 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26998 \begin_layout Standard
26999 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27001 \begin_inset Flex URL
27004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 \begin_layout Standard
27015 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27021 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27043 \begin_layout Subsection
27045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27047 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27055 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27060 or with the toolbar button
27067 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27076 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27077 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27078 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27080 name "LyX's homepage"
27081 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27085 , an Email address like this:
27086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27088 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27089 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27094 , or a link to a file.
27097 \begin_layout Standard
27098 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27111 to the link target.
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27116 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27117 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27118 the text style dialog.
27119 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27125 name "LyX's homepage"
27126 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27133 \begin_layout Standard
27134 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27138 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27141 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27145 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27147 \begin_inset Newline newline
27155 \begin_inset Newline newline
27162 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27165 \begin_layout Section
27167 \begin_inset Index idx
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27179 name "sec:Appendices"
27186 \begin_layout Standard
27187 Appendices are created with the menu
27189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27191 \begin_inset space ~
27195 \begin_inset space ~
27201 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27202 as the appendix part of the book.
27203 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27206 \begin_layout Standard
27207 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27208 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27209 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27210 and the subsection number.
27211 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27215 \begin_layout Standard
27217 \begin_inset space ~
27221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27223 reference "chap:Credits"
27228 \begin_inset space ~
27232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27234 reference "subsec:Export"
27241 \begin_layout Section
27243 \begin_inset Index idx
27246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27255 name "sec:Bibliography"
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27265 You can include a bibliography database,
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 Known under the name
27271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27274 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27284 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27285 manually, using the paragraph environment
27289 , which was described in section
27290 \begin_inset space ~
27294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27296 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27301 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27302 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27306 use a bibliography database.
27309 \begin_layout Subsection
27310 The Bibliography Environment
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27318 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27320 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27329 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27331 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27341 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27350 or the toolbar button
27353 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27357 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27358 containing the available citations.
27359 Select one or more keys from the list and
27369 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27370 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27374 \begin_layout Standard
27375 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27376 entry with surrounding brackets.
27381 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27382 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27398 Companion Second Edition
27401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27403 key "latexcompanion"
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 The \SpecialChar LyX
27412 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27413 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27422 \begin_layout Standard
27423 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27436 arg "layout-paragraph"
27440 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27443 \begin_layout Subsection
27444 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27446 \begin_inset Index idx
27449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27450 Bibliography ! Databases
27456 \begin_inset Index idx
27459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27460 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27469 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27476 \begin_layout Standard
27477 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27483 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27485 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27486 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27491 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27493 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27494 your working field in a database.
27495 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27496 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27497 list for that document.
27498 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27502 \begin_layout Standard
27503 The database is a text file with the file extension
27504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27515 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27516 The format is explained in
27517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27523 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27527 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27532 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27533 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27534 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27536 \begin_inset Flex URL
27539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27541 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27549 \begin_layout Standard
27550 To use a database, use the menu
27552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27557 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27570 \begin_inset space ~
27576 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27577 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27584 Add bibliography to TOC
27586 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27591 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27592 in the document or just the cited references.
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27596 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27608 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27609 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27610 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27611 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27613 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27619 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27620 \begin_inset Newline newline
27624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27626 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27639 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27642 \begin_layout Standard
27643 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27644 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27646 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27653 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27654 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27659 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27660 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27661 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27676 The following variants are possible:
27679 \begin_layout Description
27680 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27681 with other bibliography packages (e.
27682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27686 \begin_inset space \space{}
27693 ), only with the package
27697 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27701 \begin_layout Description
27702 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27703 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27704 with all bibliography packages, except
27709 \begin_layout Description
27710 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27715 , works with all bibliography packages
27718 \begin_layout Standard
27719 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27720 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27722 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27725 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 When you select the option
27741 Sectioned bibliography
27745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27746 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27749 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27750 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27752 Customizing Bibliographies
27756 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27761 Additional Features
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27768 the two methods of creating them.
27769 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27770 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27771 We used the style file
27775 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27778 \begin_layout Subsection
27779 Bibliography layout
27780 \begin_inset Index idx
27783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 Bibliography ! Layout
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27793 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27794 For this feature you need to enable the option
27800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27804 \begin_inset Index idx
27807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27808 Document ! Settings
27818 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27819 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27820 style files as explained in
27821 the previous section.
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27826 the citation reference window.
27827 Here is an example where the text
27828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27832 \begin_inset space ~
27836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27839 appears after the reference:
27842 \begin_layout Standard
27844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27847 key "latexcompanion"
27854 \begin_layout Section
27856 \begin_inset Index idx
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27875 \begin_layout Standard
27876 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27880 \begin_inset space ~
27885 or the toolbar button
27892 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27893 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27894 by \SpecialChar LyX
27895 as the index entry.
27898 \begin_layout Standard
27899 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27902 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27904 \begin_inset space ~
27910 A light blue box labeled
27911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27922 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27923 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27928 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27929 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27930 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27931 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27935 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27942 \begin_layout Subsection
27943 Grouping Index Entries
27944 \begin_inset Index idx
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27956 \begin_layout Standard
27957 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27959 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27960 lists under the entry
27961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27969 First we create the entry
27970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27978 \begin_inset space ~
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27984 reference "subsec:Lists"
27989 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27990 \begin_inset space ~
27994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27996 reference "sec:Itemize"
28000 , we insert the command
28003 \begin_layout Standard
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28013 \begin_layout Standard
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28020 for the enumerated list in section
28021 \begin_inset space ~
28025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28027 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28035 The exclamation mark
28036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28043 marks the grouping levels.
28044 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28045 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28046 If we don't have an index entry for
28047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28054 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28057 \begin_layout Subsection
28059 \begin_inset Index idx
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28063 Index ! Page ranges
28071 \begin_layout Standard
28072 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28074 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28075 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28076 an index entry in section
28077 \begin_inset space ~
28081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28083 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28093 Paragraph environments|(
28096 \begin_layout Standard
28097 and another entry at the end of section
28098 \begin_inset space ~
28102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28104 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28111 \begin_layout Standard
28114 Paragraph environments|)
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28142 respectively start and end the index range.
28143 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28144 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28145 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28146 An example is the index entry
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28150 Document ! Settings
28151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28157 \begin_layout Subsection
28159 \begin_inset Index idx
28162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28163 Index ! Cross referencing
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28173 We referred for example in the index entry
28174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28182 \begin_inset space ~
28186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28188 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28192 ) to the index entry
28193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28200 in the same section using the entry
28203 \begin_layout Standard
28206 GIF|see{Image formats}
28209 \begin_layout Standard
28210 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28212 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28213 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28216 \begin_layout Subsection
28218 \begin_inset Index idx
28221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28222 Index ! Entry order
28230 \begin_layout Standard
28231 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28232 follow the rules for the index order.
28233 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28239 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28241 \begin_inset space ~
28245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28247 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28256 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28257 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28282 \begin_inset Index idx
28285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28286 Dummy entries ! maïs
28292 \begin_inset Index idx
28295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 Dummy entries ! maître
28302 \begin_inset Index idx
28305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28306 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28311 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28312 maïs, maison, maître.
28313 To achieve this, we use the command
28316 \begin_layout Standard
28319 previous entry@current entry
28322 \begin_layout Standard
28323 In our case we want to have
28324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28339 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28342 \begin_layout Standard
28348 \begin_layout Standard
28349 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28350 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28352 See the next subsection for an example.
28355 \begin_layout Standard
28356 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28362 \begin_layout Standard
28363 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28368 to generate the index (see sec.
28369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28375 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28384 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28385 -package aeguill in sec.
28386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28392 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28396 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28397 -packages although all these index
28398 commands start with
28399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28412 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28417 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28432 \begin_layout Standard
28444 \begin_layout Subsection
28446 \begin_inset Index idx
28449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28450 Index ! Entry layout
28458 \begin_layout Standard
28459 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28460 \begin_inset Index idx
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 This is an italic dummy entry
28471 You can also format the page number using the character
28472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28479 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28480 -command without a backslash.
28481 We can write for example
28484 \begin_layout Standard
28487 italic page number:|textit
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 to get the page number in italic.
28492 \begin_inset Index idx
28495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28496 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28501 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28502 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28520 \begin_inset space ~
28526 Have a look at section
28527 \begin_inset space ~
28531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28533 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28537 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28541 \begin_layout Standard
28542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28550 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28554 to generate the index, see sec.
28555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28561 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28570 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28575 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28579 key "latexcompanion"
28591 \begin_layout Standard
28592 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28594 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28595 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28596 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28597 If so, put the following in the preamble
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28612 \begin_layout Standard
28616 \begin_layout Standard
28622 \begin_layout Standard
28623 in the index entry.
28624 \begin_inset Index idx
28627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28628 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28633 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28634 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28635 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28638 \begin_layout Standard
28639 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28640 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28641 a bold font for all index entries.
28642 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28654 documentation for details,
28655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28657 key "makeindex,xindy"
28664 \begin_layout Subsection
28666 \begin_inset Index idx
28669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28678 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28685 \begin_layout Standard
28686 If the index generation program
28690 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28691 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28695 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28696 distribution, is used.
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28705 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28706 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28707 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28708 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28709 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28719 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28721 dialog, see section
28722 \begin_inset space ~
28726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28728 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28733 The available options are listed and explained in
28734 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28736 key "makeindex,xindy"
28741 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28745 \begin_layout Standard
28746 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28747 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28750 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28751 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28755 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28756 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28759 \begin_layout Subsection
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28764 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28765 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28773 next to the standard index.
28775 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28776 that add this feature.
28783 \begin_inset Index idx
28786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28788 -packages ! splitidx
28793 package to generate multiple indexes.
28794 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28800 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28802 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28809 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28810 style, but it also includes
28811 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28812 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28820 \begin_layout Standard
28821 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28822 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28825 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28828 and select the option
28830 Use multiple Indexes
28837 already contains the standard index
28838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28846 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28847 also appear as a heading) to the
28851 input field and press the
28856 The new index now also appears in the list.
28857 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28858 label color to the new index.
28861 \begin_layout Standard
28862 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28872 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28873 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28874 are additional features:
28877 \begin_layout Itemize
28878 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28879 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28882 \begin_layout Itemize
28883 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28884 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28892 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28893 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28894 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28895 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28898 \begin_layout Section
28899 Nomenclature/Glossary
28900 \begin_inset Index idx
28903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28910 \begin_inset Index idx
28913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28944 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28951 \begin_layout Standard
28952 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28953 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28954 called nomenclature or glossary.
28957 \begin_layout Standard
28958 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28965 \begin_inset Index idx
28968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28970 -packages ! nomencl
28976 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28978 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28984 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28988 \begin_layout Standard
28989 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28990 and then use the menu
28992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28998 \begin_inset space ~
29003 or the toolbar button
29006 arg "nomencl-insert"
29011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29022 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29027 The first is the term or
29031 that you wish to define.
29036 of the term or symbol.
29039 \begin_layout Standard
29040 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29048 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29049 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29057 \begin_layout Subsection
29058 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29059 \begin_inset Index idx
29062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29063 Nomenclature ! Layout
29071 \begin_layout Standard
29072 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29076 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29083 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29091 \begin_inset Newline newline
29099 \begin_inset Newline newline
29105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29112 character starts/ends the formula.
29113 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29114 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29126 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29136 \begin_layout Standard
29137 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29138 -syntax is given in section
29139 \begin_inset space ~
29143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29145 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29156 \begin_inset space ~
29161 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29163 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29168 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29175 in this document is:
29176 \begin_inset Newline newline
29181 dummy entry for the character
29186 \begin_inset Newline newline
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29208 font use the command
29237 \begin_layout Standard
29238 If the characters |
29239 \begin_inset space \space{}
29243 \begin_inset space \space{}
29247 \begin_inset space \space{}
29251 \begin_inset space \space{}
29255 \begin_inset space \space{}
29258 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29259 a quote character in front of them.
29260 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29261 LatexCommand nomenclature
29262 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29263 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29270 \begin_layout Subsection
29271 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29272 \begin_inset Index idx
29275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29276 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29284 \begin_layout Standard
29285 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29286 -code of the symbol
29288 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29290 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29293 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29294 LatexCommand nomenclature
29296 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29303 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29307 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29308 LatexCommand nomenclature
29311 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29316 They will be sorted by
29317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29343 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29346 will be sorted before the
29350 since the character
29351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29358 is considered in sorting.
29361 \begin_layout Standard
29362 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29365 \begin_inset space ~
29370 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29371 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29373 For the example given, you can insert
29377 in this field for the
29378 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29385 will be located before
29386 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29393 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29407 \begin_layout Subsection
29408 Nomenclature Options
29409 \begin_inset Index idx
29412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29413 Nomenclature ! Options
29421 \begin_layout Standard
29426 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29427 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29430 \begin_layout Description
29431 refeq Appends the phrase
29432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29447 to every nomenclature entry, where
29453 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29456 \begin_layout Description
29457 refpage Appends the phrase
29458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29473 to every nomenclature entry, where
29479 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29482 \begin_layout Description
29483 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29486 \begin_layout Standard
29487 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29488 class options list in the
29490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29494 In this document the options
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29502 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29508 \begin_layout Standard
29509 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29510 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29515 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29518 \begin_layout Description
29528 \begin_layout Description
29531 nomrefpage Like the
29538 \begin_layout Description
29541 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29550 \begin_layout Description
29554 \begin_inset space ~
29560 \begin_inset space ~
29565 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29568 \begin_layout Standard
29570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29577 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29578 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29582 \begin_layout Standard
29590 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29593 \begin_inset Newline newline
29600 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29605 \begin_inset Newline newline
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29624 by their translation.
29627 \begin_layout Subsection
29628 Printing the Nomenclature
29629 \begin_inset Index idx
29632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29633 Nomenclature ! Printing
29641 \begin_layout Standard
29642 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29645 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29661 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29662 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29663 You can choose between these settings:
29666 \begin_layout Description
29667 Default a space of 1
29668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29674 \begin_layout Description
29676 \begin_inset space ~
29680 \begin_inset space ~
29683 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29686 \begin_layout Description
29687 Custom custom space
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29700 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29708 For example, in order to change the name to
29712 , add the following line to the preamble:
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29723 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29726 \begin_layout Subsection
29727 Nomenclature Program
29728 \begin_inset Index idx
29731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29732 Nomenclature ! Program
29738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29740 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29753 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29754 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29756 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29761 by adding options, see section
29762 \begin_inset space ~
29766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29768 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29773 The available options are listed and explained in
29774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29776 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29783 \begin_layout Section
29785 \begin_inset Index idx
29788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29795 \begin_inset Index idx
29798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29799 Document ! Branches
29805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29807 name "sec:Branches"
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29816 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29817 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29818 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29821 \begin_layout Standard
29822 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29823 allows you to put text into branches.
29824 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29825 To create a branch, either select the menu
29827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29828 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29831 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29840 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29841 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29842 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29843 and whether the name of the branch should
29844 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29845 (see below for an example).
29846 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29847 to the name of the other) and to add
29848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29860 \begin_inset space ~
29863 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29864 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29867 \begin_layout Standard
29868 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29869 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29874 where you can choose a branch.
29875 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29879 \begin_layout Standard
29880 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29881 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 \begin_inset Branch Question
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29889 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29897 \begin_layout Standard
29898 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29901 \begin_layout Standard
29902 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29910 \begin_layout Standard
29917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29918 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29921 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29922 Consider for example a file
29923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29930 which has the above branches.
29932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29939 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29963 branch were inactive,
29964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29979 branch was active, likewise
29980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29995 branch was active, and
29996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29999 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30003 if both branches were active.
30004 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30007 \begin_layout Standard
30008 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30015 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30016 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30017 definitions for each branch.
30018 For example you can define for the question branch
30022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30023 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30024 -syntax, see section
30025 \begin_inset space ~
30029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30031 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30043 \begin_layout Standard
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 and for the answer branch
30067 \begin_layout Standard
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30088 \begin_inset Branch Question
30091 \begin_layout Standard
30095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30123 \begin_layout Standard
30124 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30127 \begin_layout Standard
30131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30159 \begin_layout Standard
30160 Now it is possible to use the
30164 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30171 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30174 commands to obtain conditional output.
30175 Here is an example formula where only the
30182 \begin_inset Formula
30184 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30192 \begin_layout Standard
30193 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30208 \begin_inset space \space{}
30211 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30213 For this advanced usage, see the
30218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30221 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30228 \begin_layout Section
30230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30232 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30237 \begin_inset Index idx
30240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30249 \begin_layout Standard
30252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30253 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30256 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30258 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30264 \begin_inset Index idx
30267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30269 -packages ! hyperref
30274 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30275 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30276 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30277 part of the document.
30281 \begin_layout Standard
30282 The header information in the dialog tab
30286 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30287 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30288 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30289 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30293 \begin_inset space ~
30297 \begin_inset space ~
30302 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30303 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30304 and author entries.
30308 \begin_inset space ~
30312 \begin_inset space ~
30316 \begin_inset space ~
30321 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30325 You can specify in the dialog tab
30329 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30334 \begin_inset space ~
30338 \begin_inset space ~
30342 \begin_inset space ~
30347 option allows long links to be split;
30350 \begin_inset space ~
30354 \begin_inset space ~
30358 \begin_inset space ~
30366 \begin_inset space ~
30371 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30374 \begin_inset space ~
30379 colors the different links.
30380 The default colors are:
30383 \begin_layout Labeling
30384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30389 for hyperlinks and URLs
30392 \begin_layout Labeling
30393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30401 \begin_layout Labeling
30402 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 but you can change these in the field
30416 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30422 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30425 \begin_layout Standard
30430 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30431 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30432 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30440 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30441 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30442 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30452 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30453 when opening the PDF.
30455 \begin_inset space ~
30458 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30459 \begin_inset space ~
30462 1 will only display the sections.
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30467 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30473 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30474 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30483 \begin_layout Section
30485 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30489 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30496 \begin_layout Subsection
30499 \begin_inset Index idx
30502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30512 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30519 \begin_layout Standard
30520 As \SpecialChar LyX
30521 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30522 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30523 commands and constructs,
30526 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30527 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30528 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30529 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30530 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30531 cannot support all packages and
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30536 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30537 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30538 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30542 Code box is created by the menu
30544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 \begin_inset space ~
30562 or by the toolbar button
30575 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30583 \begin_layout Standard
30584 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30586 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30588 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30589 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30596 , you can write the command part
30602 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30603 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30607 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30608 Code box behind the word.
30609 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30610 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 \begin_inset Graphics
30616 filename clipart/ERT.png
30624 \begin_layout Standard
30628 \begin_layout Standard
30629 This is a line with a
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30666 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30667 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30668 know that the command is finished.
30676 \begin_layout Subsection
30677 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30679 \begin_inset Argument 1
30682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30690 \begin_inset Index idx
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30703 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30710 \begin_layout Standard
30711 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30712 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30713 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30714 uses in the background.
30715 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30716 is based on commands, you can
30717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30725 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30726 any time if you know the right commands.
30727 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30728 is the end of the day.
30729 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30730 all caption labels bold.
30731 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30733 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30738 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30740 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30742 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30754 \begin_layout Standard
30755 As result you find that the package
30760 \begin_inset Index idx
30763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 -packages ! caption
30771 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30776 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 \begin_inset space ~
30799 \begin_layout Standard
30804 usepackage[options]{package name}
30807 \begin_layout Standard
30808 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30809 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30810 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30811 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30814 \begin_layout Standard
30815 In your case the package name is
30820 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30825 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30826 So you add the command
30829 \begin_layout Standard
30834 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30843 For more commands provided by the
30847 package, have a look at its documentation,
30848 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30862 \begin_layout Standard
30863 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30865 For example if you use a
30869 class, you don't need the package
30873 , you can instead write
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30881 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30886 \begin_layout Standard
30887 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30888 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30889 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30896 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30900 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30901 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30903 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30904 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30905 Code box as described in the previous
30909 \begin_layout Standard
30910 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30911 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30914 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30916 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30923 \begin_layout Standard
30924 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30930 \begin_layout Standard
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30944 \begin_inset Note Note
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30948 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30956 \begin_layout Left Header
30957 \begin_inset Argument 1
30960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30980 \begin_inset Note Note
30983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 defines the header line as described below
30992 \begin_layout Center Header
30993 \begin_inset Argument 1
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 \begin_layout Right Header
31006 \begin_inset Argument 1
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31030 \begin_layout Left Footer
31031 \begin_inset Argument 1
31034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31055 \begin_layout Center Footer
31056 \begin_inset Argument 1
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31071 \begin_inset Newline newline
31075 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31081 \begin_layout Right Footer
31082 \begin_inset Argument 1
31085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31107 \begin_layout Section
31108 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31111 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31116 \begin_inset Index idx
31119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31120 Document ! Header/Footer line
31126 \begin_inset Index idx
31129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31138 \begin_layout Standard
31139 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31143 \begin_inset space ~
31154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31160 \begin_inset space ~
31166 As a second step add in the menu
31168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31176 Custom Header/Footerlines
31177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31181 This module offers the following 6
31182 \begin_inset space ~
31188 \begin_layout Description
31190 \begin_inset space ~
31194 \begin_inset space ~
31198 \begin_inset space ~
31202 \begin_inset space ~
31206 \begin_inset space ~
31212 \begin_layout Description
31214 \begin_inset space ~
31218 \begin_inset space ~
31222 \begin_inset space ~
31226 \begin_inset space ~
31230 \begin_inset space ~
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31237 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31240 \begin_layout Standard
31241 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31242 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31244 \begin_inset space ~
31248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31250 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31254 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31257 \begin_layout Standard
31258 \begin_inset Float figure
31264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 \begin_inset Tabular
31268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31269 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31270 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31272 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31274 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31292 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31321 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31332 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31336 The normal text on the page goes here.
31337 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31339 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31340 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31345 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31383 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31394 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31412 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31430 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31435 name "fig:Page-layout"
31439 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31452 \begin_layout Standard
31453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31461 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31465 \begin_inset space ~
31470 is set to “Default”.
31471 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31480 \begin_layout Subsection
31484 \begin_layout Standard
31485 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31486 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31487 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31488 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31490 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31491 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31496 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 \begin_inset space ~
31521 \begin_layout Description
31524 thepage prints the current page number
31527 \begin_layout Description
31530 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31533 \begin_layout Description
31536 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31539 \begin_layout Description
31542 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31543 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31550 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31553 because it usually goes in a left header.
31556 \begin_layout Description
31559 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31560 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31562 It is normally used in the right header.
31565 \begin_layout Subsection
31566 Default header/footer
31569 \begin_layout Standard
31570 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31571 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31572 footer has the page number.
31573 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31574 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31575 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31578 \begin_inset space ~
31586 \begin_layout Subsection
31590 \begin_layout Standard
31591 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31592 Some pages are different.
31593 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31594 a new part or chapter in your book.
31595 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31596 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31597 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31601 Header and footer decoration line
31604 \begin_layout Standard
31605 By default, you get a 0.4
31606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31609 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31610 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31622 in the following way:
31625 \begin_layout Standard
31632 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31635 \begin_layout Standard
31636 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31645 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31652 \begin_layout Standard
31653 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31655 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31656 \begin_inset space ~
31660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31670 Several header/footer lines
31673 \begin_layout Standard
31674 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31675 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31676 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31678 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31694 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31707 \begin_inset space ~
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31722 headheight}{height}
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31726 where height is a size in standard units.
31727 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31728 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31729 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31730 logfile with the menu
31732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31750 \begin_inset space ~
31755 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31760 \begin_inset Index idx
31763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31765 -packages ! fancyhdr
31771 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31772 for your header/footer.
31775 \begin_layout Subsection
31779 \begin_layout Standard
31780 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31781 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31782 This example consists of the following definition:
31785 \begin_layout Description
31787 \begin_inset space ~
31796 , empty optional argument
31799 \begin_layout Description
31801 \begin_inset space ~
31804 Header empty, empty optional argument
31807 \begin_layout Description
31809 \begin_inset space ~
31818 in the optional argument
31821 \begin_layout Description
31823 \begin_inset space ~
31832 in the optional argument
31835 \begin_layout Description
31837 \begin_inset space ~
31850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31854 \begin_inset Newline newline
31858 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31865 in the optional argument
31868 \begin_layout Description
31870 \begin_inset space ~
31879 , empty optional argument
31882 \begin_layout Description
31885 headrulewidth set to 2
31886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31894 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31900 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31910 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31924 pagestyle{headings}
31930 \begin_inset Note Note
31933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31934 switches back to page style with the default headings
31942 \begin_layout Section
31943 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31946 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31951 \begin_inset Index idx
31954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31961 \begin_inset Index idx
31964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31973 \begin_layout Standard
31975 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31976 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31977 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31980 \begin_layout Subsection
31984 \begin_layout Standard
31985 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31991 \begin_inset Index idx
31994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31996 -packages ! preview-latex
32001 (on some systems named simply
32006 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32014 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32016 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32024 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32025 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32026 -package are automatically
32027 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32031 \begin_layout Subsection
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32037 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32039 activate the option
32042 \begin_inset space ~
32049 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32055 \begin_inset space ~
32059 \begin_inset space ~
32062 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32069 \begin_inset space ~
32082 \begin_inset space ~
32087 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32090 \begin_layout Standard
32091 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32096 \begin_inset space ~
32104 \begin_inset space ~
32112 \begin_layout Standard
32113 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32114 and when you finish
32118 \begin_layout Standard
32119 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32127 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32128 generated by activating the option
32131 \begin_inset space ~
32137 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32145 \begin_layout Subsection
32146 Selected document parts
32149 \begin_layout Standard
32150 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32151 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32152 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32153 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32155 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32161 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32162 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32163 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32166 \begin_layout Standard
32167 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32174 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32186 is explained in section
32188 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32193 \begin_inset space ~
32203 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32204 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32205 the final rotated boxes,
32206 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32207 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32209 Here is the result:
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32213 \begin_inset Preview
32215 \begin_layout Standard
32220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32224 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32230 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32240 height_special "totalheight"
32245 backgroundcolor "none"
32248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32279 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32301 \begin_layout Standard
32302 Previewing works also for colors.
32303 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32322 is explained in section
32329 \begin_inset space ~
32342 \begin_layout Standard
32343 \begin_inset Preview
32345 \begin_layout Standard
32349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32368 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32373 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32400 If \SpecialChar LyX
32401 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32402 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32403 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32404 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32405 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32406 the \SpecialChar TeX
32408 If \SpecialChar LyX
32409 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32410 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32412 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32413 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32414 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32417 \begin_layout Subsection
32422 \begin_layout Standard
32423 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32424 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32427 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32429 \begin_inset space ~
32434 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32436 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32438 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32439 's main window, then only this selection
32440 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32441 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32442 the source view window.
32447 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32448 ; but note that if you have
32449 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32451 not just the one which is open at the time.
32454 \begin_layout Section
32455 Advanced Find and Replace
32456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32458 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32463 \begin_inset Index idx
32466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32473 \begin_inset Index idx
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32485 \begin_layout Subsection
32489 \begin_layout Standard
32490 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32491 allows for searching of complex,
32492 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32494 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32495 The key-features are:
32498 \begin_layout Itemize
32499 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32500 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32501 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32505 \begin_layout Itemize
32506 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32507 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32508 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32509 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32512 \begin_layout Itemize
32513 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32514 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32515 outside of mathematics environments
32518 \begin_layout Itemize
32519 Search may be widened to a specific
32524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32528 \begin_inset space ~
32531 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32532 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32539 \begin_layout Itemize
32540 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32541 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32546 \begin_inset space ~
32549 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32552 \begin_layout Subsection
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32557 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32559 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32572 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32575 ) or the toolbar button
32578 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32584 Advanced Find and Replace
32589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32599 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32603 \begin_inset space ~
32608 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32611 arg "paragraph-break"
32615 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32616 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32620 arg "paragraph-break"
32623 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32627 searches backwards.
32630 \begin_layout Standard
32634 \begin_inset space ~
32639 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32648 \begin_inset space ~
32653 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32656 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32657 Searching for mathematics
32660 \begin_layout Standard
32661 Mathematical formulas, such as
32662 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32665 or something more complex like
32666 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32669 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32674 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32675 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32676 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32677 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32687 \begin_layout Standard
32688 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32689 This is done by switching to the
32693 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32698 This way, entering in the
32705 \begin_layout Itemize
32706 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32707 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32710 \begin_layout Itemize
32711 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32712 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32715 \begin_layout Itemize
32716 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32717 of it only within section headings.
32718 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32719 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32723 \begin_layout Itemize
32724 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32725 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 The entries made in the
32737 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32740 \begin_inset space ~
32746 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32750 button or alternatively press
32753 arg "paragraph-break"
32760 while the cursor is in the
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32771 \begin_layout Standard
32772 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32774 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32778 \begin_layout Itemize
32779 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32780 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32788 with its typewriter version
32789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32803 \begin_layout Itemize
32804 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32810 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32822 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32829 (you may want to enable the
32832 \begin_inset space ~
32840 \begin_inset space ~
32845 options and disable the
32853 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32861 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32862 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32866 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32869 , or occurrences of
32870 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32874 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32880 \begin_layout Subsection
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32885 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32890 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32892 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32894 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32903 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32909 This is done with the context menu
32911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32912 Insert Regular Expression
32914 while the cursor is in the
32919 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32920 expression matching rules
32924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32925 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32932 \begin_inset space ~
32935 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32936 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32942 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32943 same text in the document.
32944 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32945 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32948 \begin_layout Enumerate
32949 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32954 editor the fraction
32955 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32959 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32962 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32963 fractions with the given denominator.
32966 \begin_layout Enumerate
32967 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32979 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32984 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32985 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32986 Also, by inserting a
32987 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32990 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32991 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32994 \begin_layout Standard
32995 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32996 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32997 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33000 , and referring back to them through
33001 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33005 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33009 For example, try searching with the regexp
33010 \begin_inset Newline newline
33013 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33016 \begin_inset Newline newline
33019 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33022 \begin_layout Standard
33023 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33027 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33035 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33036 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33037 sub-expressions is absolute.
33039 \begin_inset space ~
33043 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33046 always refers to the first occurrence of
33047 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33050 in all entered regexps.
33058 \begin_layout Section
33060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33062 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33067 \begin_inset Index idx
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33081 has a built-in spell checker.
33084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33091 key or the toolbar button
33094 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33097 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33098 beginning of the currently selected text.
33099 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33100 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33101 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33102 scrolled so that it is visible.
33103 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33104 n, if any could be found.
33105 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33109 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33110 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33114 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33121 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33122 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33124 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33125 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33128 \begin_inset space ~
33136 arg "dialog-show character"
33139 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33141 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33144 \begin_layout Standard
33145 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33146 can be downloaded from here:
33147 \begin_inset Newline newline
33151 \begin_inset Flex URL
33154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33156 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33162 \begin_inset Newline newline
33166 \begin_inset space ~
33169 files for each language.
33170 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33171 \begin_inset space ~
33174 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33175 's installation subfolder
33183 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33185 \begin_inset Newline newline
33188 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33189 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33190 but in most cases these are
33206 is the language code.
33209 \begin_layout Subsection
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33216 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33217 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33219 \begin_inset space ~
33222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33225 you can set the following things:
33228 \begin_layout Description
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33233 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33234 should use for spell checking.
33235 Depending on your platform,
33249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33250 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33251 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33266 \begin_layout Description
33268 \begin_inset space ~
33271 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33272 will always use the given language
33273 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33276 \begin_layout Description
33278 \begin_inset space ~
33281 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33287 \begin_inset space \space{}
33291 This should normally not be needed.
33294 \begin_layout Description
33296 \begin_inset space ~
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33303 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33315 \begin_layout Description
33317 \begin_inset space ~
33320 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33321 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33322 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33323 appear in a context menu.
33324 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33328 \begin_layout Description
33330 \begin_inset space ~
33334 \begin_inset space ~
33338 \begin_inset space ~
33341 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33345 \begin_layout Section
33347 \begin_inset Index idx
33350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33359 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33368 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33369 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33381 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33390 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33392 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33393 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33394 which are available for many languages.
33397 \begin_layout Standard
33398 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33399 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33403 \begin_layout Subsection
33404 Setting up the thesaurus
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33416 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33420 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33425 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33439 For instance, the US English files are named:
33442 \begin_layout Itemize
33446 \begin_layout Itemize
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33459 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33460 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33464 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33465 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33467 \begin_inset space ~
33472 ) to the path where they are installed.
33476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33477 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33478 ies, typical locations are
33484 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33488 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33492 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33495 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33501 LibreOffice-<Version>
33508 On the Mac, the default location is
33510 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33511 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33512 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33513 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33514 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33515 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33523 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33524 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33525 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33530 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33531 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33535 \begin_layout Itemize
33536 \begin_inset Flex URL
33539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33541 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33549 \begin_layout Standard
33550 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33551 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33553 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33554 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33555 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33557 \begin_inset space ~
33562 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33564 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33565 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33570 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33572 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33575 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33581 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33584 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33585 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33593 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33594 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33595 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33597 \begin_inset space ~
33602 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33605 \begin_layout Subsection
33606 Using the thesaurus
33609 \begin_layout Standard
33610 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33615 or the toolbar button
33618 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33621 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33623 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33625 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33626 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33627 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33636 ), related terms (such as
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33648 ), compounds (such as
33651 \begin_inset space ~
33660 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33669 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33673 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33674 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33680 the dictionary, such as the above
33684 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33689 \begin_inset space \space{}
33692 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33693 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33694 For example, looking up the word form
33698 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33703 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33708 \begin_inset space \space{}
33719 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33720 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33721 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33724 \begin_layout Section
33726 \begin_inset Index idx
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33736 \begin_inset Index idx
33739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33740 Document ! Change Tracking
33746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33748 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33755 \begin_layout Standard
33756 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33757 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33758 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33759 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33761 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33763 \begin_inset space ~
33766 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33776 \begin_layout Standard
33777 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33791 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33792 You can change the color in
33794 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33795 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33797 \begin_inset space ~
33801 \begin_inset space ~
33806 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33812 \begin_inset Index idx
33815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33816 Color ! Change tracking
33821 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33822 's status bar when the
33823 cursor is in changed text.
33824 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33827 arg "changes-merge"
33833 \begin_layout Standard
33834 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33836 \begin_inset Index idx
33839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33848 \begin_layout Standard
33849 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33855 \begin_layout Standard
33856 \begin_inset Graphics
33857 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33865 \begin_layout Standard
33866 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33877 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33883 \begin_layout Standard
33884 \begin_inset Tabular
33885 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33886 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33887 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33888 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33898 arg "changes-track"
33906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33917 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33919 \begin_inset space ~
33928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33937 arg "changes-output"
33945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33956 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33996 Jumps to the next change
34002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34011 arg "change-accept"
34019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34030 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34050 arg "change-reject"
34058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34069 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34089 arg "changes-merge"
34097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34105 \begin_inset space ~
34108 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34128 arg "all-changes-accept"
34136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34144 \begin_inset space ~
34147 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34149 \begin_inset space ~
34153 \begin_inset space ~
34162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34171 arg "all-changes-reject"
34179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34187 \begin_inset space ~
34190 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34229 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34274 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34276 \begin_inset space ~
34292 \begin_layout Standard
34293 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34299 \begin_layout Standard
34300 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34321 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34322 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34323 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34324 the next change after the current cursor position.
34325 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34326 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34327 step to the next change.
34328 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34331 \begin_layout Standard
34332 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34333 to describe a change.
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34343 \begin_inset Index idx
34346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34348 -packages ! dvipost
34354 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34362 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34366 \begin_layout Section
34367 Comparison of Documents
34368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34370 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34375 \begin_inset Index idx
34378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34379 Comparison of documents
34387 \begin_layout Standard
34388 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34395 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34396 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34398 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34400 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34404 \begin_inset space ~
34408 \begin_inset space ~
34412 \begin_inset space ~
34421 \begin_inset space ~
34425 \begin_inset space ~
34429 \begin_inset space ~
34433 \begin_inset space ~
34437 \begin_inset space ~
34441 \begin_inset space ~
34446 enables the change tracking option
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34453 \begin_inset space ~
34457 \begin_inset space ~
34462 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34465 \begin_layout Section
34466 International Support
34467 \begin_inset Index idx
34470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 International support
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34481 with any language you want.
34482 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34483 up \SpecialChar LyX
34485 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34487 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34494 \begin_layout Standard
34495 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34496 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34503 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34510 \begin_layout Subsection
34512 \begin_inset Index idx
34515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34522 \begin_inset Index idx
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34526 Document ! Settings
34532 \begin_inset Index idx
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34536 Document ! Language
34544 \begin_layout Standard
34547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34548 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34551 dialog lets you set
34553 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34558 \begin_layout Standard
34563 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34568 \begin_inset space ~
34573 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34574 For details about the different encoding options see section
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34581 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34589 Keyboard mapping configuration
34590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34592 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34599 \begin_layout Standard
34600 If you have for example a U.
34601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34604 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34605 can use an alternate keymap.
34606 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34611 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34612 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34613 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34616 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34617 \begin_inset space ~
34621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34623 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34628 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34629 which one you want to use.
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34634 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34635 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34639 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34640 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34641 one to support the characters you want.
34642 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34649 \begin_layout Chapter
34652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34654 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34662 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34663 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34664 topic inside the user's guide.
34667 \begin_layout Section
34669 \begin_inset Index idx
34672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34681 \begin_layout Standard
34686 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34689 \begin_layout Subsection
34693 \begin_layout Standard
34694 Creates a new document.
34697 \begin_layout Subsection
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34702 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34703 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34704 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34707 \begin_layout Subsection
34711 \begin_layout Standard
34715 \begin_layout Subsection
34719 \begin_layout Standard
34720 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34721 Click there on a file to open it.
34724 \begin_layout Subsection
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34729 Closes the current document.
34732 \begin_layout Subsection
34736 \begin_layout Standard
34737 Closes all opened documents.
34740 \begin_layout Subsection
34744 \begin_layout Standard
34745 Saves the actual document.
34748 \begin_layout Subsection
34752 \begin_layout Standard
34753 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34756 \begin_layout Subsection
34760 \begin_layout Standard
34761 Saves all opened documents.
34764 \begin_layout Subsection
34768 \begin_layout Standard
34769 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34772 \begin_layout Subsection
34776 \begin_layout Standard
34777 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34778 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34779 It is described in the section
34781 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34786 Additional Features
34791 \begin_layout Subsection
34795 \begin_layout Standard
34796 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34797 -versions, HTML-files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34798 -files, NoWeb-files,
34799 plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34800 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34804 \begin_layout Standard
34805 When using the menu entry
34808 \begin_inset space ~
34813 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34821 \begin_inset space ~
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34830 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34831 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34834 \begin_layout Subsection
34836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34838 name "subsec:Export"
34845 \begin_layout Standard
34846 You can export your document to various file formats.
34847 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34849 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34850 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34851 during its configuration.
34854 \begin_layout Standard
34855 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34857 \begin_inset space ~
34861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34863 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34870 \begin_layout Description
34876 \begin_inset space ~
34883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34890 yX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34892 \begin_inset space ~
34895 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34896 \begin_inset Newline newline
34899 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34900 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34904 \begin_layout Description
34905 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34911 \begin_layout Description
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34916 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34922 \begin_layout Description
34923 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34924 's native DVI-format.
34925 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34926 files paths or file names in your document.
34928 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34935 \begin_layout Description
34936 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34937 in files paths or file names
34940 \begin_layout Description
34942 \begin_inset space ~
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34956 eX) DVI-format using the program
34958 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34961 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34965 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34973 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34981 \begin_layout Description
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34986 (cropped) the same as
34990 but with cropped page margins.
34993 \begin_layout Description
34995 \begin_inset space ~
34998 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35002 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35007 \begin_layout Description
35011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35019 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35027 \begin_layout Description
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset space ~
35036 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35040 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35048 \begin_layout Description
35055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35087 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35088 source that is compilable with the program
35090 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35094 \begin_layout Description
35101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35114 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35115 source, additionally all images used in the document
35116 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35120 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35123 \begin_layout Description
35130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35138 \begin_inset space ~
35143 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35144 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35145 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35153 \begin_layout Description
35160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35168 \begin_inset space ~
35179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35193 source that is compilable with the program
35199 \begin_layout Description
35201 \begin_inset space ~
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35224 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35225 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35231 \begin_layout Description
35238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35251 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35252 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35258 \begin_inset space \space{}
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35282 represent the version number)
35285 \begin_layout Description
35292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35309 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35310 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35311 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35315 \begin_layout Description
35322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35331 yXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35332 's internal XHTML engine
35335 \begin_layout Description
35336 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35341 \begin_layout Description
35342 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
35344 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35347 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
35351 \begin_layout Description
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35356 (cropped) the same as
35359 \begin_inset space ~
35364 but with cropped page margins
35367 \begin_layout Description
35371 \begin_inset space ~
35376 PDF-format using the program
35380 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35383 \begin_layout Description
35387 \begin_inset space ~
35391 \begin_inset space ~
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35404 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35409 \begin_inset space \space{}
35412 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35416 \begin_layout Description
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35436 PDF-format using the program
35438 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35441 , produces PDF-files directly
35444 \begin_layout Description
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35453 PDF-format using the program
35457 , produces PDF-files directly
35460 \begin_layout Description
35464 \begin_inset space ~
35469 PDF-format using the program
35473 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35476 \begin_layout Description
35480 \begin_inset space ~
35487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35496 PDF-format using the program
35501 , produces PDF-files directly
35504 \begin_layout Description
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35516 \begin_layout Description
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35529 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35530 and then exported as text using the program
35535 \begin_layout Description
35540 PostScript format using the program
35545 \begin_layout Description
35546 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35547 source and also code in the statistical programming
35561 it is possible to use
35565 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 If one of the menu entries
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35586 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35588 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35590 \begin_inset space ~
35594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35596 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35601 \begin_inset Index idx
35604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35605 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35614 \begin_layout Subsection
35618 \begin_layout Standard
35619 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35620 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35623 \begin_inset space ~
35627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35629 reference "sec:Paths"
35634 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35643 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35644 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35645 's preferences as described in section
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35652 reference "subsec:Converters"
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35660 New and Close Window
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35668 \begin_layout Subsection
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35673 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35676 \begin_layout Section
35678 \begin_inset Index idx
35681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35690 \begin_layout Subsection
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35695 Described in section
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35702 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35709 \begin_layout Subsection
35710 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35713 \begin_layout Standard
35714 Described in section
35715 \begin_inset space ~
35719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35721 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35728 \begin_layout Subsection
35732 \begin_layout Standard
35733 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35734 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35737 \begin_layout Subsection
35741 \begin_layout Standard
35742 Selects the whole document.
35745 \begin_layout Subsection
35746 Find & Replace (Quick)
35749 \begin_layout Standard
35750 Described in section
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35757 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35764 \begin_layout Subsection
35765 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35768 \begin_layout Standard
35769 Described in section
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35776 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35783 \begin_layout Subsection
35784 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35787 \begin_layout Standard
35788 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35792 \begin_layout Subsection
35796 \begin_layout Standard
35797 Described in section
35798 \begin_inset space ~
35802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35804 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35811 \begin_layout Subsection
35813 \begin_inset Index idx
35816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35817 Paragraph ! Settings
35825 \begin_layout Standard
35826 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35827 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35831 \begin_layout Standard
35832 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35833 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35840 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35842 \begin_inset space ~
35850 \begin_layout Subsection
35854 \begin_layout Standard
35855 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35856 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35857 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35861 \begin_layout Standard
35862 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35864 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35865 The properties of tables are described in section
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35872 reference "sec:Tables"
35876 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35883 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35890 \begin_layout Subsection
35891 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35894 \begin_layout Standard
35895 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35897 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35904 reference "sec:Nesting"
35909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35911 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35918 \begin_layout Subsection
35921 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35924 \begin_layout Standard
35925 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35926 nts of the same type.
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35934 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35938 for an explanation.
35941 \begin_layout Section
35943 \begin_inset Index idx
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35955 \begin_layout Standard
35956 At the bottom of the
35960 menu the opened documents are listed.
35963 \begin_layout Subsection
35964 Open/Close all Insets
35967 \begin_layout Standard
35968 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35971 \begin_layout Subsection
35972 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35975 \begin_layout Standard
35976 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35979 \begin_layout Standard
35980 Math macros are described in the
35987 \begin_layout Subsection
35991 \begin_layout Standard
35992 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35999 reference "sec:Navigating"
36004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36006 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36013 \begin_layout Subsection
36017 \begin_layout Standard
36018 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36020 \begin_inset space ~
36024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36026 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36033 \begin_layout Subsection
36037 \begin_layout Standard
36038 Opens a window showing console messages.
36039 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36044 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36045 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36046 is processing the document.
36049 \begin_layout Subsection
36051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36053 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36058 \begin_inset Index idx
36061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36070 \begin_layout Standard
36071 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36072 All toolbars and the
36075 \begin_inset space ~
36080 can be turned on and off.
36085 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36114 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36118 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36125 \begin_layout Standard
36130 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36134 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36135 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36136 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36137 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36138 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36141 \begin_layout Standard
36143 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36150 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36157 \begin_layout Subsection
36161 \begin_layout Standard
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36173 \begin_inset space ~
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36181 \begin_inset space ~
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36190 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36191 's main window vertically while
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36219 will split it horizontally.
36220 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36221 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36222 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36223 three or more documents at the same time.
36224 To close a split view, use the menu
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36239 \begin_layout Subsection
36243 \begin_layout Standard
36244 Closes a split view.
36247 \begin_layout Subsection
36251 \begin_layout Standard
36252 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36253 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36254 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36255 's main window fullscreen.
36256 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36257 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36260 \begin_layout Section
36262 \begin_inset Index idx
36265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 \begin_layout Subsection
36278 \begin_layout Standard
36279 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36286 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36297 \begin_layout Subsection
36299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36301 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36308 \begin_layout Standard
36309 Here you can insert the following characters:
36312 \begin_layout Description
36317 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36320 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36321 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36322 -packages you have installed.
36323 You can get a complete display by checking
36326 \begin_inset space ~
36332 \begin_inset Newline newline
36336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36344 Not all characters will be visible in the
36348 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36356 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36360 ) can display every character.
36368 \begin_layout Description
36369 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36373 \begin_layout Description
36375 \begin_inset space ~
36379 \begin_inset space ~
36382 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36389 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36396 \begin_layout Description
36398 \begin_inset space ~
36401 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36405 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36411 \begin_layout Description
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36416 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36420 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36426 \begin_layout Description
36428 \begin_inset space ~
36431 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36435 \begin_layout Description
36437 \begin_inset space ~
36440 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36444 \begin_layout Description
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36449 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36455 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36461 \begin_layout Description
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36466 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36470 \begin_layout Description
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset Index idx
36479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36486 \begin_inset Index idx
36489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36490 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36495 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36496 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36498 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36504 \begin_inset Index idx
36507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36515 \begin_inset Newline newline
36518 More information about this feature can be found in the
36524 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36530 \begin_layout Subsection
36534 \begin_layout Standard
36535 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36538 \begin_layout Description
36539 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36540 \begin_inset script superscript
36542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36551 \begin_layout Description
36552 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36553 \begin_inset script subscript
36555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36564 \begin_layout Description
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36569 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36576 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36583 \begin_layout Description
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36588 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36595 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36602 \begin_layout Description
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36607 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36621 \begin_layout Description
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36626 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36632 \begin_inset space \space{}
36635 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36636 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36645 To insert a fraction use the command
36650 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36654 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36663 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36670 \begin_layout Description
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36675 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36682 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36689 \begin_layout Description
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36694 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36695 \begin_inset space ~
36699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36701 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36708 \begin_layout Description
36710 \begin_inset space ~
36713 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36714 \begin_inset space ~
36718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36720 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36727 \begin_layout Description
36728 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36735 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36742 \begin_layout Description
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36747 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36754 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36761 \begin_layout Description
36763 \begin_inset space ~
36766 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36773 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36780 \begin_layout Description
36782 \begin_inset space ~
36786 \begin_inset space ~
36789 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36796 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36803 \begin_layout Description
36805 \begin_inset space ~
36808 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36809 as described in section
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36816 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36823 \begin_layout Description
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36828 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36835 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36842 \begin_layout Description
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36847 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36848 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36856 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36863 \begin_layout Description
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36868 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36869 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36875 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36882 \begin_layout Description
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36891 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36892 \begin_inset space ~
36896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36898 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36905 \begin_layout Subsection
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36910 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36935 are described in section
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36942 reference "sec:toc"
36951 is described in section
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36958 reference "sec:Index"
36966 is described in section
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36973 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36979 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36982 is described in section
36983 \begin_inset space ~
36987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36989 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36996 \begin_layout Subsection
37000 \begin_layout Standard
37001 To insert floats, as described in section
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37008 reference "sec:Floats"
37012 and in detail the chapter
37019 \begin_inset space ~
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 To insert notes, described in section
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "sec:Notes"
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37053 Branches are described in section
37054 \begin_inset space ~
37058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37060 reference "sec:Branches"
37067 \begin_layout Subsection
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37073 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37075 An example is the document class
37076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37083 with three custom insets.
37086 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37090 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37096 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37099 \begin_layout Subsection
37101 \begin_inset Index idx
37104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37113 \begin_layout Standard
37114 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37116 For more information see chapter
37118 External Document Parts
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37127 \begin_layout Subsection
37129 \begin_inset Index idx
37132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37141 \begin_layout Standard
37142 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37143 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37158 \begin_layout Subsection
37162 \begin_layout Standard
37167 dialog as described in section
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37174 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37181 \begin_layout Subsection
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37190 as described in section
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37197 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37213 as described in section
37214 \begin_inset space ~
37218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37220 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37227 \begin_layout Subsection
37229 \begin_inset Index idx
37232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37239 \begin_inset Index idx
37242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37243 Longtables ! Caption
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37252 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
37253 Floats are described in section
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37260 reference "sec:Floats"
37264 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37279 \begin_layout Subsection
37283 \begin_layout Standard
37284 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37291 reference "sec:Index"
37298 \begin_layout Subsection
37302 \begin_layout Standard
37303 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37310 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37317 \begin_layout Subsection
37321 \begin_layout Standard
37322 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37323 Tables are described in section
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37330 reference "sec:Tables"
37334 and in detail in the chapter
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37349 \begin_layout Subsection
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37359 Graphics are described in section
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37366 reference "sec:Graphics"
37373 \begin_layout Subsection
37377 \begin_layout Standard
37378 Inserts a URL as described in section
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37385 reference "subsec:URLs"
37392 \begin_layout Subsection
37396 \begin_layout Standard
37397 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37404 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37411 \begin_layout Subsection
37415 \begin_layout Standard
37416 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37417 \begin_inset space ~
37421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37423 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37430 \begin_layout Subsection
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37435 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37436 \begin_inset space ~
37440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37442 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37449 \begin_layout Subsection
37453 \begin_layout Standard
37454 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37455 title or caption of a float.
37456 Inserts a short title as described in section
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37463 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37470 \begin_layout Subsection
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37477 Code box as described in section
37478 \begin_inset space ~
37482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37484 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37491 \begin_layout Subsection
37493 \begin_inset Index idx
37496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37505 \begin_layout Standard
37506 Inserts a program listings box.
37507 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37509 Program Code Listings
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37522 \begin_layout Subsection
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 Inserts the actual date.
37528 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37532 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37540 \begin_inset space ~
37548 \begin_layout Subsection
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37560 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37567 \begin_layout Section
37569 \begin_inset Index idx
37572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37582 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37586 of the current document.
37587 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37590 \begin_layout Subsection
37594 \begin_layout Standard
37595 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37596 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37597 to jump, for example, between section
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37602 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37606 2.5 and use the submenu
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37636 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37640 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37646 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37649 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37652 \begin_layout Standard
37653 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37657 \begin_inset space ~
37662 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37670 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37673 \begin_layout Subsection
37674 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37678 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37682 \begin_layout Subsection
37686 \begin_layout Standard
37687 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37688 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37689 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37693 \begin_inset space ~
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37705 \begin_layout Subsection
37709 \begin_layout Standard
37710 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37713 The \SpecialChar LyX
37714 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37724 \begin_inset space ~
37729 manual for a detailed description.
37732 \begin_layout Section
37734 \begin_inset Index idx
37737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37746 \begin_layout Subsection
37750 \begin_layout Standard
37751 Change Tracking is described in section
37752 \begin_inset space ~
37756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37758 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37765 \begin_layout Subsection
37770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37780 \begin_layout Standard
37781 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37782 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37783 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37785 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37786 to the clipboard or update the view.
37787 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 Start Appendix Here
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37797 as described in section
37798 \begin_inset space ~
37802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37804 reference "sec:Appendices"
37811 \begin_layout Subsection
37813 \begin_inset space ~
37819 \begin_layout Standard
37820 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37821 default output format for the document (menu
37823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37824 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37825 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37827 \begin_inset space ~
37831 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset space ~
37841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37843 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37847 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37850 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37851 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37856 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37861 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37863 \begin_inset space ~
37867 \begin_inset space ~
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37879 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37883 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37884 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37886 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37887 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37892 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37897 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37907 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37912 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37913 when it is first configured.
37914 The default output format is
37917 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_layout Subsection
37926 View (Other Formats)
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37931 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37932 actual document with an external program.
37933 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37934 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37935 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37937 All possible formats are listed in section
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37944 reference "subsec:Export"
37949 You should at least see the menu entry
37954 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37956 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37964 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37969 \begin_inset Index idx
37972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37973 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37982 \begin_layout Standard
37983 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37984 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37986 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37987 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37989 \begin_inset space ~
37992 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37997 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38001 \begin_inset space ~
38005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38007 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38012 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38013 when it is first configured.
38016 \begin_layout Subsection
38018 \begin_inset space ~
38024 \begin_layout Standard
38025 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38026 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38029 \begin_layout Subsection
38030 Update (Other Formats)
38033 \begin_layout Standard
38034 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38035 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38038 \begin_layout Subsection
38039 View Master Document
38042 \begin_layout Standard
38043 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38059 \begin_inset space ~
38064 manual for more information on this topic).
38065 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38066 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38079 generates the output of the whole book, while
38083 will just output the chapter alone.
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38087 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38088 in the document settings (menu
38090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38091 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38092 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38094 \begin_inset space ~
38098 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38110 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38114 ) or in the preferences (menu
38116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38117 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38119 \begin_inset space ~
38122 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38127 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38145 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38152 \begin_layout Subsection
38153 Update Master Document
38156 \begin_layout Standard
38157 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38173 \begin_inset space ~
38178 manual for more information on this topic).
38179 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38180 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38185 in the document settings (menu
38187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38188 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38189 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38191 \begin_inset space ~
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38201 \begin_inset space ~
38205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38207 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38211 ) or in the preferences (menu
38213 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38214 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38216 \begin_inset space ~
38219 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38224 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38226 \begin_inset space ~
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38236 \begin_inset space ~
38240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38242 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38249 \begin_layout Subsection
38253 \begin_layout Standard
38254 Un/compresses the current document.
38257 \begin_layout Subsection
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38262 The document settings are described in appendix
38263 \begin_inset space ~
38267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38269 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38276 \begin_layout Section
38278 \begin_inset Index idx
38281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38290 \begin_layout Subsection
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38295 Spell checking is explained in section
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38302 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38309 \begin_layout Subsection
38313 \begin_layout Standard
38314 The thesaurus is described in section
38315 \begin_inset space ~
38319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38321 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38328 \begin_layout Subsection
38330 \begin_inset Index idx
38333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38340 \begin_inset Index idx
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38353 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38354 the highlighted document part.
38357 \begin_layout Subsection
38362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38370 \begin_inset Index idx
38373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38374 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38383 \begin_layout Standard
38384 Generates with the help of the program
38386 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38389 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38390 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38391 This feature is not available on Windows.
38394 \begin_layout Subsection
38399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38407 \begin_inset Index idx
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 \begin_layout Standard
38421 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38426 \begin_inset space ~
38431 to see the full filename paths.
38434 \begin_layout Subsection
38436 \begin_inset Index idx
38439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38448 \begin_layout Standard
38449 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38450 files as described in section
38451 \begin_inset space ~
38455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38457 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38464 \begin_layout Subsection
38466 \begin_inset Index idx
38469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38482 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38500 \begin_inset Index idx
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38515 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38516 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38517 -packages and programs it needs; see
38519 \begin_inset space ~
38523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38525 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38532 \begin_layout Subsection
38536 \begin_layout Standard
38541 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38542 \begin_inset space ~
38546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38548 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38555 \begin_layout Section
38557 \begin_inset Index idx
38560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38569 \begin_layout Standard
38570 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38571 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38573 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38577 \begin_layout Standard
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38587 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38588 -document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38589 -packages and classes found
38590 by \SpecialChar LyX
38592 \begin_inset space ~
38596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38598 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38605 \begin_layout Standard
38609 \begin_inset space ~
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38625 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38630 \begin_layout Section
38632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38634 name "sec:Toolbars"
38641 \begin_layout Standard
38642 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38649 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38656 \begin_layout Standard
38657 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38658 This is described in the
38660 Additional Features
38665 \begin_layout Subsection
38667 \begin_inset Index idx
38670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 \begin_layout Standard
38680 \begin_inset Graphics
38681 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38689 \begin_layout Standard
38690 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38696 \begin_layout Standard
38697 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38714 \begin_inset Note Note
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38723 manual for more information.
38731 \begin_layout Standard
38732 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38738 \begin_layout Standard
38739 \begin_inset Tabular
38740 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38741 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 \begin_inset Graphics
38750 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38764 pull-down box for the environments
38777 \begin_layout Standard
38778 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38784 \begin_layout Standard
38786 \begin_inset Tabular
38787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38788 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38790 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38814 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38844 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38890 arg "dialog-show print"
38898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38904 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38920 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38994 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39100 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39196 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39197 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39225 Emphasize text, function of the
39227 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39229 \begin_inset space ~
39232 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39262 Set text to noun style, function of the
39264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39269 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39287 arg "textstyle-apply"
39295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39299 Format text using the current settings in the
39301 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39303 \begin_inset space ~
39306 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39339 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39341 \begin_inset space ~
39350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 arg "tabular-insert"
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 Toggle outline window on/off,
39431 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39447 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39474 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39486 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39499 \begin_layout Subsection
39501 \begin_inset Index idx
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39513 \begin_layout Standard
39514 \begin_inset Graphics
39515 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39523 \begin_layout Standard
39524 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39531 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39535 \begin_layout Standard
39536 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39542 \begin_layout Standard
39543 \begin_inset Tabular
39544 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39545 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39546 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39547 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39584 arg "layout Enumerate"
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39611 arg "layout Itemize"
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 arg "layout Description"
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39692 arg "depth-increment"
39700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39712 \begin_inset space ~
39721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 arg "depth-decrement"
39738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39746 \begin_inset space ~
39750 \begin_inset space ~
39759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39768 arg "float-insert figure"
39776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39783 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39799 arg "float-insert table"
39807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39814 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39860 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39936 \begin_inset space ~
39945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 arg "nomencl-insert"
39962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 arg "footnote-insert"
39996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40018 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40067 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40080 \begin_inset space ~
40089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40098 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40207 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40222 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40238 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40253 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40273 arg "dialog-show character"
40281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40287 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40292 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40308 arg "layout-paragraph"
40316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40322 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40342 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40356 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40370 \begin_layout Subsection
40371 View/Update Toolbar
40372 \begin_inset Index idx
40375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40376 Toolbar ! View / Update
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40385 \begin_inset Graphics
40386 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40394 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40400 \begin_layout Standard
40401 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40405 \begin_layout Standard
40406 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40412 \begin_layout Standard
40413 \begin_inset Tabular
40414 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40415 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40416 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40417 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40457 arg "buffer-update"
40465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40487 arg "master-buffer-view"
40495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40501 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40521 arg "master-buffer-update"
40529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40559 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40575 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40576 Synchronize with Output
40582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40587 \begin_inset Graphics
40588 filename ../images/view-others.png
40590 groupId toolbarbuttons
40601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40608 View (Other Formats)
40614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 \begin_inset Graphics
40620 filename ../images/update-others.png
40622 groupId toolbarbuttons
40631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40638 Update (Other Formats)
40651 \begin_layout Standard
40652 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40656 \begin_layout Subsection
40660 \begin_layout Standard
40661 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40668 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40672 , the table toolbar
40673 \begin_inset Index idx
40676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40690 manual and the math macro toolbar
40691 \begin_inset Index idx
40694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40707 \begin_layout Chapter
40708 The Document Settings
40709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40711 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40716 \begin_inset Index idx
40719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40720 Document ! Settings
40728 \begin_layout Standard
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40737 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40738 is called with the menu
40740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40744 You can save your document settings as default with the
40746 Save as Document Defaults
40748 button in any dialog.
40749 This will create a template named
40753 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40754 when you create a new document without
40758 \begin_layout Standard
40763 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40764 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40767 \begin_layout Standard
40768 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40769 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40770 to find the one you are looking for.
40771 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40772 the submenus of the dialog.
40774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40778 \begin_inset space \space{}
40782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40789 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40790 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40791 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40794 \begin_layout Section
40798 \begin_layout Standard
40799 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40801 Document classes are described in section
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40808 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40816 \begin_layout Standard
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40825 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40830 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40831 as a layout for a document class.
40832 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40834 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40843 \begin_layout Standard
40844 Some classes use special class options by default.
40845 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40849 and you can decide to use them or not.
40850 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40851 recommended you leave them untouched.
40856 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40857 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40862 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40864 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40870 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40871 \begin_inset Newline newline
40876 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40879 \begin_inset Newline newline
40882 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40883 distribution, see section
40888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40890 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40902 \begin_layout Standard
40907 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40908 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40909 in the background if the child document
40910 is opened without its master.
40911 This way child documents are always compilable.
40912 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_layout Standard
40928 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40939 \begin_inset Index idx
40942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40944 -packages ! prettyref
40950 \begin_inset Index idx
40953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40955 -packages ! refstyle
40960 for cross-references, see section
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40967 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40974 \begin_layout Section
40978 \begin_layout Standard
40979 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40980 Please refer to the section
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40996 manual for details.
40999 \begin_layout Section
41003 \begin_layout Standard
41004 Modules are explained in section
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41011 reference "subsec:Modules"
41018 \begin_layout Section
41022 \begin_layout Standard
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41030 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41037 \begin_layout Section
41041 \begin_layout Standard
41042 The document font settings are described in section
41043 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41049 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41056 \begin_layout Section
41060 \begin_layout Standard
41061 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41078 and whether it should be a
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41086 can also be specified here.
41089 \begin_layout Standard
41090 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41091 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41092 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41094 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41097 \begin_layout Standard
41100 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41103 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41104 justifies the text on screen.
41105 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41109 \begin_layout Section
41113 \begin_layout Standard
41114 This dialog is described in sections
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41121 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41128 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41135 \begin_layout Section
41139 \begin_layout Standard
41140 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41147 reference "subsec:Margins"
41154 \begin_layout Section
41156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41158 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41163 \begin_inset Index idx
41166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41167 Language ! Encoding
41175 \begin_layout Standard
41176 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41177 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41178 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41180 is always encoded in utf8).
41181 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41182 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41183 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41184 -command is not known for
41185 a particular character).
41188 \begin_layout Standard
41189 If you use the option
41194 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41195 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41196 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41198 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41199 exactly one encoding.
41200 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41203 \begin_layout Standard
41205 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41206 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41207 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41208 installation supports Unicode), choose
41209 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41210 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41211 is quite incomplete, so
41212 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41217 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41218 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41219 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41220 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41221 -commands is not used, because all
41222 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41223 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41224 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41225 , two new alternative engines
41226 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41228 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41230 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41274 (Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41284 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41289 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41293 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41296 \begin_layout Standard
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41305 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41306 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41316 The possible settings are:
41319 \begin_layout Description
41320 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41322 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41323 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41333 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41340 \begin_layout Description
41341 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41342 format you will use.
41343 In many cases this will be
41348 \begin_inset Index idx
41351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41359 If the newer package
41364 \begin_inset Index idx
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41369 -packages ! polyglossia
41374 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41375 or LuaTeX and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41377 this package will be used instead of
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41397 would be more appropriate.
41400 \begin_layout Description
41401 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41402 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41406 (for German texts), type in
41409 \begin_inset Newline newline
41414 usepackage{ngerman}
41417 \begin_layout Description
41418 None will not use a language package.
41419 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41422 \begin_layout Standard
41423 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41426 \begin_layout Description
41428 \begin_inset space ~
41432 \begin_inset space ~
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41443 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41449 \begin_inset Index idx
41452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41454 -packages ! inputenc
41460 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41461 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41462 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41466 \begin_layout Description
41467 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41469 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41470 commands, which may result in a big
41471 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41472 -commands are needed.
41475 \begin_layout Description
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41484 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41487 \begin_layout Description
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41496 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41499 \begin_layout Description
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41504 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41507 \begin_layout Description
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41516 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41517 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41520 \begin_layout Description
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41529 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41533 \begin_layout Description
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41542 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41543 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41546 \begin_layout Description
41548 \begin_inset space ~
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41556 \begin_inset space ~
41559 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41566 \begin_layout Description
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41579 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41580 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41583 \begin_layout Description
41585 \begin_inset space ~
41589 \begin_inset space ~
41592 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41593 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41594 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41595 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41606 \begin_layout Description
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41615 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41616 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41617 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41619 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41630 \begin_layout Description
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41639 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41642 \begin_layout Description
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41651 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41654 \begin_layout Description
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset space ~
41663 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41666 \begin_layout Description
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41671 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41674 \begin_layout Description
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41679 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41682 \begin_layout Description
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41691 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41694 \begin_layout Description
41696 \begin_inset space ~
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_layout Description
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41715 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41718 \begin_layout Description
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_layout Description
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41739 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41745 \begin_inset Index idx
41748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41755 , when using this, set the document language to
41760 \begin_layout Description
41762 \begin_inset space ~
41766 \begin_inset space ~
41769 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41774 , when using this, set the document language to
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_layout Description
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41792 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41798 \begin_inset Index idx
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 -packages ! japanese
41808 , when using this, set the document language to
41813 \begin_layout Description
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41822 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41827 , when using this, set the document language to
41832 \begin_layout Description
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41841 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41846 , when using this, set the document language to
41851 \begin_layout Description
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41856 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41859 \begin_layout Description
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41872 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41875 \begin_layout Description
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41881 \begin_inset space ~
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41888 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41889 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41890 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41893 \begin_layout Description
41895 \begin_inset space ~
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41905 \begin_layout Description
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41914 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41915 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41918 \begin_layout Description
41920 \begin_inset space ~
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41927 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41933 \begin_inset Index idx
41936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41943 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41946 \begin_layout Description
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41951 (Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41956 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41963 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41966 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41973 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41974 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41976 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41979 \begin_layout Description
41981 \begin_inset space ~
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41994 \begin_inset Index idx
41997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42007 \begin_layout Description
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42012 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42018 \begin_inset Index idx
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42023 -packages ! inputenc
42029 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42033 \begin_layout Description
42035 \begin_inset space ~
42039 \begin_inset space ~
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42046 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42047 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_layout Description
42055 \begin_inset space ~
42059 \begin_inset space ~
42063 \begin_inset space ~
42066 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42067 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42068 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42072 \begin_layout Description
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42085 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42086 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42089 \begin_layout Section
42091 \begin_inset Index idx
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 \begin_inset Index idx
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42111 \begin_inset Index idx
42114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42115 Color ! Shaded boxes
42121 \begin_inset Index idx
42124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42133 \begin_layout Standard
42134 Here you can alter the font color for the
42138 (default: black), for
42141 \begin_inset space ~
42146 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42150 (default: white) and for
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42163 sets the color back to the default.
42166 \begin_layout Standard
42167 Clicking any button showing
42175 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42176 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42177 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42178 later more quickly.
42181 \begin_layout Standard
42182 Note, if you change the
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42190 font color and use the option
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42198 in the document settings under
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42206 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42213 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42220 \begin_layout Standard
42221 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42227 \begin_layout Standard
42231 \begin_inset space ~
42240 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42246 Code after a forced page break:
42249 \begin_layout Itemize
42250 For the page color:
42251 \begin_inset Newline newline
42258 pagecolor{color name}
42261 \begin_layout Itemize
42262 For the text color:
42263 \begin_inset Newline newline
42273 \begin_layout Standard
42274 You are restricted to one of
42310 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42323 \begin_inset Newline newline
42326 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42327 names to refer to them:
42330 \begin_layout Itemize
42336 \begin_inset Newline newline
42341 page_backgroundcolor
42344 \begin_layout Itemize
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42354 \begin_inset Newline newline
42362 \begin_layout Itemize
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset Newline newline
42380 \begin_layout Itemize
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42390 \begin_inset Newline newline
42398 \begin_layout Standard
42399 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_layout Section
42422 \begin_layout Standard
42423 Here you can adjust the
42427 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42431 as described in section
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42438 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42445 \begin_layout Section
42449 \begin_layout Standard
42450 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42456 \begin_inset Index idx
42459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 \begin_inset Index idx
42474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42476 -packages ! jurabib
42484 Sectioned bibliography
42486 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42492 \begin_inset Index idx
42495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42497 -packages ! bibtopic
42502 and you can select a
42506 for the generation of the bibliography.
42507 For a further description see section
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42514 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42521 \begin_layout Section
42525 \begin_layout Standard
42526 Here you can define the
42530 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42532 \begin_inset space ~
42536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42538 reference "sec:Index"
42545 \begin_layout Section
42549 \begin_layout Standard
42550 The PDF properties are explained in section
42551 \begin_inset space ~
42555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42557 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42564 \begin_layout Section
42568 \begin_layout Standard
42569 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42570 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42576 \begin_inset Index idx
42579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42581 -packages ! amsmath
42591 \begin_inset Index idx
42594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42596 -packages ! amssymb
42606 \begin_inset Index idx
42609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42621 \begin_inset Index idx
42624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42636 \begin_inset Index idx
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42641 -packages ! mathdots
42651 \begin_inset Index idx
42654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42656 -packages ! mathtools
42666 \begin_inset Index idx
42669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42681 \begin_inset Index idx
42684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 -packages ! stackrel
42696 \begin_inset Index idx
42699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42701 -packages ! stmaryrd
42711 \begin_inset Index idx
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42716 -packages ! undertilde
42721 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42724 \begin_layout Description
42725 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42726 -errors in formulas,
42727 ensure that you have this enabled.
42730 \begin_layout Description
42731 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42732 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42733 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42737 \begin_layout Description
42738 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42753 \begin_layout Description
42754 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42757 \begin_inset space ~
42769 \begin_layout Description
42770 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42781 \begin_layout Description
42782 mathtools is used for the math commands
42818 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42825 \begin_layout Description
42826 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42828 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42837 \begin_layout Description
42838 stackrel is used for the math command
42855 \begin_layout Description
42856 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42859 \begin_layout Description
42860 undertilde is used for the math command
42868 Accents for one Character
42877 \begin_layout Section
42881 \begin_layout Standard
42882 The float placement options are described in the section
42885 \begin_inset space ~
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42901 \begin_layout Section
42905 \begin_layout Standard
42906 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42908 Program Code Listings
42913 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_layout Section
42925 \begin_layout Standard
42926 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42934 set to be used and set the
42939 The itemize environment is described in section
42940 \begin_inset space ~
42944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42946 reference "sec:Itemize"
42953 \begin_layout Standard
42954 You can furthermore specify a
42957 \begin_inset space ~
42962 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42963 command of the desired character.
42964 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42971 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42977 \begin_inset space \space{}
42981 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42991 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42992 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42995 \begin_layout Standard
42996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43004 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43005 -packages in the preamble (menu
43008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43009 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43012 \begin_inset space ~
43018 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43022 usepackage{textcomp}
43025 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43029 usepackage{amssymb}
43039 \begin_layout Section
43043 \begin_layout Standard
43044 Branches are described in section
43045 \begin_inset space ~
43049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43051 reference "sec:Branches"
43058 \begin_layout Section
43060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43062 name "sec:Doc-Output"
43069 \begin_layout Standard
43070 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43073 \begin_layout Description
43075 \begin_inset space ~
43079 \begin_inset space ~
43082 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43102 View Master Document
43103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43110 Update Master Document
43111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43118 menu or the toolbar.
43119 The default is set in
43121 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43122 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43127 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43131 \begin_inset space ~
43135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43137 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43144 \begin_layout Description
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43153 Output settings for the menu
43155 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43157 \begin_inset space ~
43163 For a detailed description see section
43165 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43170 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_layout Description
43180 \begin_inset space ~
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43187 Options offers settings for the export format
43193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43211 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43212 \begin_inset space ~
43215 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43219 \begin_inset space ~
43224 settings are described in detail in section
43226 Math Output in XHTML
43231 \begin_inset space ~
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43249 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43252 \begin_layout Section
43257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43268 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43270 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43272 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43274 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43278 \begin_layout Standard
43279 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43280 -syntax is given in section
43281 \begin_inset space ~
43285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43287 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43294 \begin_layout Chapter
43300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43302 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43307 \begin_inset Index idx
43310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43322 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43326 It has the following submenus.
43329 \begin_layout Section
43333 \begin_layout Subsection
43337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43338 User Interface File
43339 \begin_inset Index idx
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43343 Customization ! of toolbars
43349 \begin_inset Index idx
43352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43353 Customization ! of menus
43361 \begin_layout Standard
43362 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43363 interface (ui) file.
43364 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43372 \begin_layout Description
43377 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43380 \begin_layout Description
43387 the menu entries in popup context menus
43390 \begin_layout Description
43395 specifies the toolbar buttons
43398 \begin_layout Standard
43399 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43400 and edit the entries.
43403 \begin_layout Standard
43404 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43416 entries must be finished with an explicit
43441 and in the case of the
43442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43454 The syntax for the entries is:
43457 \begin_layout Standard
43458 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43489 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43492 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43493 -functions are listed in the menu
43495 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43508 \begin_inset space ~
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43517 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43523 \begin_layout Standard
43524 For example, assuming you use the menu
43526 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43529 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43533 \begin_layout Standard
43534 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43558 \begin_layout Standard
43560 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43575 to have the sixth bookmark.
43578 \begin_layout Standard
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43587 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43588 's toolbar buttons.
43589 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43593 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43607 Enable tool tips in main work area
43609 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43613 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43622 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43623 should display in the menu
43625 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_layout Subsection
43639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43646 Restore window layouts and geometries
43649 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43650 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43654 \begin_layout Standard
43657 Restore cursor positions
43659 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43663 \begin_layout Standard
43666 Load opened files from last session
43668 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43672 \begin_layout Standard
43675 Clear all session information
43677 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43678 sessions (cursor positions, names
43679 of last opened documents, etc.).
43682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43686 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43691 \begin_inset Index idx
43694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43703 \begin_layout Standard
43706 Backup original documents when saving
43708 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43709 it was saved the last time.
43710 It is stored in the
43713 \begin_inset space ~
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43725 reference "sec:Paths"
43729 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43738 The backup file has the file extension
43739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43756 Backup documents, every
43758 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43761 \begin_layout Standard
43764 Save documents compressed by default
43766 always saves files in a compressed format.
43769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43770 Windows & work area
43773 \begin_layout Standard
43776 Open documents in tabs
43778 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43787 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43800 reference "sec:Paths"
43804 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43811 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43812 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43813 of \SpecialChar LyX
43815 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43816 instance is created for each file.
43819 \begin_layout Standard
43822 Single close-tab button
43824 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43827 \begin_inset Graphics
43828 filename ../images/closetab.png
43835 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43836 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43839 \begin_layout Standard
43840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43849 before the change takes effect.
43857 \begin_layout Standard
43862 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43864 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43866 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43870 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43871 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43872 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43875 \begin_layout Subsection
43877 \begin_inset Index idx
43880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43889 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43901 \begin_layout Standard
43902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 This section only deals with the fonts
43914 the \SpecialChar LyX
43916 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43920 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43931 \begin_layout Standard
43932 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43949 (depends on the system) as its
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43969 You can change the font size with the
43976 \begin_layout Standard
43981 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43986 points have the size of 1
43987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43997 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44002 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44007 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44014 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44021 \begin_layout Standard
44024 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44026 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44027 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44028 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44029 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44030 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44032 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_layout Subsection
44041 \begin_inset Index idx
44044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44045 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44052 \begin_inset Index idx
44055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44064 \begin_layout Standard
44065 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44066 by choosing an item in the
44067 list and selecting the
44074 \begin_layout Standard
44075 By checking the option
44079 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44082 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44092 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44095 \begin_layout Subsection
44097 \begin_inset Index idx
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44109 \begin_layout Standard
44110 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44114 \begin_layout Standard
44119 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44120 This feature is described in section
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44127 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44134 \begin_layout Standard
44135 Checking the option
44138 \begin_inset space ~
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44151 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44154 \begin_layout Section
44156 \begin_inset Index idx
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44168 \begin_layout Subsection
44172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44176 \begin_layout Standard
44179 Cursor follows scrollbar
44181 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44185 \begin_layout Standard
44186 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44187 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44188 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44191 \begin_layout Standard
44194 Scroll below end of document
44196 is self-explanatory.
44199 \begin_layout Standard
44200 In \SpecialChar LyX
44201 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44208 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44210 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44211 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44214 \begin_layout Standard
44217 Sort environments alphabetically
44219 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44222 \begin_layout Standard
44225 Group environments by their category
44227 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44230 \begin_layout Standard
44235 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44250 \begin_layout Standard
44251 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44256 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44257 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44261 \begin_layout Subsection
44263 \begin_inset Index idx
44266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44273 \begin_inset Index idx
44276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44277 Settings ! Shortcuts
44285 \begin_layout Standard
44290 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44291 -function to a key.
44292 Several binding files are available, among them:
44295 \begin_layout Description
44296 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44299 \begin_layout Description
44300 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44312 \begin_layout Description
44313 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44324 \begin_layout Standard
44325 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44330 , and binding files for special languages.
44331 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44336 \begin_inset space \space{}
44340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44348 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44349 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44350 will try to use the appropriate binding
44354 \begin_layout Standard
44355 Some binding files, like
44359 , only have a limited scope.
44360 When looking at the end of the file
44364 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44367 \begin_layout Standard
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44375 \begin_inset space ~
44380 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44381 in the selected key binding file.
44384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44388 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44393 \begin_inset Index idx
44396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44397 Key Bindings ! Editing
44405 \begin_layout Standard
44406 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44407 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44408 -functions and the bound shortcuts.
44409 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44412 Show key-bindings containing
44415 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44416 Insert there for example as keyword
44417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44424 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44425 functions that contain
44426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44434 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44435 All \SpecialChar LyX
44436 -functions are also listed in the file
44441 that you will find in the
44448 \begin_layout Standard
44449 For example, to add the shortcut
44457 , select the function and press the
44462 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44463 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44466 \begin_layout Standard
44467 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44468 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44470 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44471 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44473 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44478 \begin_layout Standard
44479 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44482 \begin_layout Standard
44483 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44485 The syntax of the entries is:
44488 \begin_layout Standard
44494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44513 \begin_layout Subsection
44515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44517 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44522 \begin_inset Index idx
44525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 \begin_inset Index idx
44535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44536 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44544 \begin_layout Standard
44545 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44546 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44547 provides keyboard maps.
44548 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44549 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44561 and select the keyboard map file named
44568 \begin_layout Standard
44577 keyboard map and, if you use the
44581 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44584 arg "keymap-primary"
44590 arg "keymap-secondary"
44593 respectively or toggle between them with
44596 arg "keymap-toggle"
44602 \begin_layout Standard
44603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44611 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44620 \begin_layout Standard
44621 You can also specify the mouse
44623 Wheel scrolling speed
44626 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44630 \begin_layout Standard
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44642 \begin_inset space ~
44647 you can select a key for zooming.
44648 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44651 \begin_layout Subsection
44655 \begin_layout Standard
44656 Input completion is described in section
44657 \begin_inset space ~
44661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44663 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44670 \begin_layout Section
44672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44679 \begin_inset Index idx
44682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44689 \begin_inset Index idx
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44701 \begin_layout Standard
44702 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44703 are normally determined during
44705 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44708 \begin_layout Description
44710 \begin_inset space ~
44713 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44714 's working directory.
44715 It is the default when you
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_layout Description
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44739 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44741 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44743 \begin_inset space ~
44747 \begin_inset space ~
44755 \begin_layout Description
44757 \begin_inset space ~
44760 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44766 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44770 \begin_inset Newline newline
44774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44787 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44795 \begin_layout Description
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44801 \begin_inset Index idx
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44811 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44818 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44826 will be used to save the backups.
44827 \begin_inset Newline newline
44830 Backup files have the ending
44831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44841 \begin_layout Description
44846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44857 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44858 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44860 \begin_inset Newline newline
44867 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44873 You can edit this file with the program
44882 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44883 in its preferences under
44886 \begin_inset space ~
44892 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44897 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44899 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44900 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44906 and \SpecialChar LyX
44907 need to be running the same time.
44908 \begin_inset Newline newline
44911 The pipe is also used for the
44916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44922 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44927 \begin_inset Newline newline
44930 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44931 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44932 \begin_inset Newline newline
44948 \begin_layout Description
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44953 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44956 \begin_layout Description
44958 \begin_inset space ~
44961 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44962 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44963 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44966 \begin_layout Description
44968 \begin_inset space ~
44971 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44977 You only need to specify it if you are using
44981 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44983 For \SpecialChar LyX
44988 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44992 \begin_layout Description
44994 \begin_inset space ~
44997 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44998 When \SpecialChar LyX
44999 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45000 to find it on the system.
45001 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45003 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45012 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45013 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45016 \begin_layout Description
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45021 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45022 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45023 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45024 code or in the document
45026 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45028 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45029 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45030 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45031 scanned for the input files.
45032 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45033 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45035 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45036 compilation may fail for some documents.
45039 \begin_layout Section
45043 \begin_layout Standard
45044 Here you can insert your
45053 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45061 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45065 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45068 \begin_layout Section
45070 \begin_inset Index idx
45073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45074 Language ! Settings
45080 \begin_inset Index idx
45083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45084 Settings ! Language
45092 \begin_layout Subsection
45094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45096 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45103 \begin_layout Description
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45112 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45114 You can find its actual translation status here:
45115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45117 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45124 \begin_layout Description
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45129 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45130 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45131 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45132 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45149 The most widespread language package is
45154 \begin_inset Index idx
45157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45164 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45166 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45167 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45168 come with the alternative
45174 \begin_inset Index idx
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45179 -packages ! polyglossia
45184 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45185 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45191 The available selections are described in section
45192 \begin_inset space ~
45196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45198 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45205 \begin_layout Description
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45210 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45211 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45212 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45213 An example is the start command
45219 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45221 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45240 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45245 \begin_layout Description
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45255 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45256 command toggles the package on and off.
45259 \begin_layout Description
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45265 \begin_inset space ~
45268 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45272 \begin_layout Description
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45281 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45285 \begin_layout Description
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45294 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45295 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45296 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45298 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45305 \begin_layout Description
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45310 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45312 When this option is not set, the
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45320 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45322 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45325 \begin_inset space ~
45333 \begin_layout Description
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45341 \begin_inset space ~
45347 When it is not set, the
45350 \begin_inset space ~
45355 is set to the end of the document.
45358 \begin_layout Description
45360 \begin_inset space ~
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45367 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45368 language will be underlined in blue.
45371 \begin_layout Description
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45380 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45381 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45384 \begin_layout Description
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45389 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45390 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45391 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45392 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45395 \begin_layout Subsection
45399 \begin_layout Standard
45400 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45407 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45414 \begin_layout Section
45418 \begin_layout Subsection
45422 \begin_layout Description
45424 \begin_inset space ~
45428 \begin_inset space ~
45431 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45434 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45435 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45437 \begin_inset space ~
45443 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45446 \begin_layout Description
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45452 \begin_inset Index idx
45455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 \begin_inset Index idx
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45466 Settings ! Date format
45471 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45472 \begin_inset Newline newline
45476 \begin_inset Flex URL
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
45487 \begin_inset Newline newline
45490 For example the format
45491 \begin_inset Newline newline
45495 \begin_inset Newline newline
45498 prints the date as day/month/year.
45501 \begin_layout Description
45503 \begin_inset space ~
45507 \begin_inset space ~
45510 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45511 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45514 \begin_layout Description
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45521 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45529 For a detailed description see section
45531 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45536 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_layout Subsection
45549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45559 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45564 \begin_inset Index idx
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45568 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45577 \begin_layout Description
45579 \begin_inset space ~
45586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45594 \begin_inset space ~
45598 \begin_inset space ~
45601 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45606 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45627 are used for Cyrillic.
45628 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45641 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45643 sets up in the background.
45644 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45647 \begin_layout Description
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45656 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45661 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45665 \begin_layout Description
45667 \begin_inset space ~
45671 \begin_inset space ~
45675 \begin_inset space ~
45679 \begin_inset space ~
45682 options They only have an effect when the program
45686 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45689 \begin_layout Standard
45690 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45691 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45692 manuals of the applications.
45695 \begin_layout Description
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45700 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45707 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45714 \begin_layout Description
45716 \begin_inset space ~
45719 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45720 \begin_inset space ~
45724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45726 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45733 \begin_layout Description
45735 \begin_inset space ~
45738 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45739 \begin_inset space ~
45743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45745 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45752 \begin_layout Description
45757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45765 \begin_inset space ~
45768 command Command for the program
45770 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45773 that is described in the section
45775 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45780 Additional Features
45785 \begin_layout Standard
45786 There are additionally the following options:
45789 \begin_layout Description
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45795 \begin_inset space ~
45799 \begin_inset space ~
45803 \begin_inset space ~
45808 \begin_inset space ~
45811 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45829 to separate folders.
45830 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45832 \begin_inset Index idx
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45842 \begin_inset Index idx
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45854 \begin_layout Description
45856 \begin_inset space ~
45860 \begin_inset space ~
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45868 \begin_inset space ~
45872 \begin_inset space ~
45876 \begin_inset space ~
45879 changes Removes all manually set
45885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45888 \begin_inset space ~
45893 dialog when changing the document class.
45896 \begin_layout Section
45898 \begin_inset space ~
45902 \begin_inset Index idx
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 \begin_layout Subsection
45916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45918 name "subsec:Converters"
45923 \begin_inset Index idx
45926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45935 \begin_layout Standard
45936 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45937 from one format to another.
45938 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45939 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45951 field and press the
45956 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45960 \begin_inset space ~
45965 drop-down list, modify the
45969 field and press the
45976 \begin_layout Standard
45979 Converter File Cache
45985 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45987 Maximum Age (in days
45990 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45991 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45994 \begin_layout Standard
45995 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45996 definition, is described in the section
46007 \begin_layout Subsection
46009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46011 name "sec:File-Formats"
46016 \begin_inset Index idx
46019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 \begin_inset Index idx
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46038 \begin_layout Standard
46039 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46049 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46052 \begin_layout Standard
46053 You can also define the
46055 Default output format
46057 that is used when you use
46059 View, Update, View Master Document
46063 Update Master Document
46069 menu or the toolbar.
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46084 \begin_layout Standard
46085 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46087 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46088 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46089 This is done by specifying a
46094 More about this is described in the section
46105 \begin_layout Chapter
46106 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46108 \begin_inset Index idx
46111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46120 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46127 \begin_layout Standard
46129 \begin_inset space ~
46133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46135 reference "tab:Units"
46139 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46140 and used in this documentation.
46143 \begin_layout Standard
46144 \begin_inset Float table
46150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46151 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46177 \begin_inset Tabular
46178 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46179 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 scaled point (65536
46333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46393 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46448 % of original image width
46455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46662 \begin_layout Chapter
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46666 name "chap:Credits"
46673 \begin_layout Standard
46674 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46675 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46678 \begin_layout Itemize
46681 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46684 \begin_layout Itemize
46690 \begin_layout Itemize
46696 \begin_layout Itemize
46702 \begin_layout Itemize
46708 \begin_layout Itemize
46714 \begin_layout Itemize
46720 \begin_layout Itemize
46726 \begin_layout Itemize
46729 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46732 \begin_layout Itemize
46738 \begin_layout Itemize
46744 \begin_layout Itemize
46750 \begin_layout Itemize
46756 \begin_layout Itemize
46762 \begin_layout Itemize
46768 \begin_layout Itemize
46774 \begin_layout Itemize
46780 \begin_layout Itemize
46781 The \SpecialChar LyX
46783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46792 \begin_layout Standard
46793 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46796 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46803 \begin_layout Bibliography
46804 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46805 LatexCommand bibitem
46811 The \SpecialChar LyX
46813 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46816 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46821 \begin_inset Newline newline
46825 \begin_inset Flex URL
46828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46830 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46838 \begin_layout Bibliography
46839 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46840 LatexCommand bibitem
46841 key "latexcompanion"
46845 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46847 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46848 Companion Second Edition.
46851 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46854 \begin_layout Bibliography
46855 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46856 LatexCommand bibitem
46861 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46864 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46868 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46871 \begin_layout Bibliography
46872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46873 LatexCommand bibitem
46881 : A Document Preparation System.
46884 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46887 \begin_layout Bibliography
46888 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46889 LatexCommand bibitem
46898 The \SpecialChar TeX
46902 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46905 \begin_layout Bibliography
46906 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46907 LatexCommand bibitem
46912 The \SpecialChar TeX
46914 \begin_inset Newline newline
46918 \begin_inset Flex URL
46921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46923 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46931 \begin_layout Bibliography
46932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46933 LatexCommand bibitem
46938 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46940 \begin_inset Newline newline
46944 \begin_inset Flex URL
46947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46949 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46957 \begin_layout Bibliography
46958 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46959 LatexCommand bibitem
46965 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46967 name "Documentation"
46968 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46974 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46978 \begin_inset Newline newline
46982 \begin_inset Flex URL
46985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46987 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46995 \begin_layout Bibliography
46996 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46997 LatexCommand bibitem
47003 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47005 name "Documentation"
47006 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47010 how to use the program
47012 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47016 \begin_inset Newline newline
47020 \begin_inset Flex URL
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47025 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47033 \begin_layout Bibliography
47034 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47035 LatexCommand bibitem
47041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47043 name "Documentation"
47044 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47053 \begin_inset Newline newline
47057 \begin_inset Flex URL
47060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47062 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47070 \begin_layout Bibliography
47071 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47072 LatexCommand bibitem
47078 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47080 name "Documentation"
47081 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47090 \begin_inset Newline newline
47094 \begin_inset Flex URL
47097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47107 \begin_layout Bibliography
47108 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47109 LatexCommand bibitem
47115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47117 name "Documentation"
47118 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47122 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47124 \begin_inset Newline newline
47128 \begin_inset Flex URL
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47141 \begin_layout Bibliography
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47143 LatexCommand bibitem
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47151 name "Documentation"
47152 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47156 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47162 \begin_inset Index idx
47165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47167 -packages ! caption
47173 \begin_inset Newline newline
47177 \begin_inset Flex URL
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47182 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47190 \begin_layout Bibliography
47191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47192 LatexCommand bibitem
47198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47200 name "Documentation"
47201 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47205 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47211 \begin_inset Index idx
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47216 -packages ! enumitem
47222 \begin_inset Newline newline
47226 \begin_inset Flex URL
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47231 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47239 \begin_layout Bibliography
47240 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47241 LatexCommand bibitem
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47249 name "Documentation"
47250 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47254 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47260 \begin_inset Index idx
47263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47265 -packages ! fancyhdr
47271 \begin_inset Newline newline
47275 \begin_inset Flex URL
47278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47280 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47288 \begin_layout Bibliography
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47290 LatexCommand bibitem
47296 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47298 name "Documentation"
47299 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47303 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47309 \begin_inset Index idx
47312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47314 -packages ! hyperref
47320 \begin_inset Newline newline
47324 \begin_inset Flex URL
47327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47329 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47337 \begin_layout Bibliography
47338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47339 LatexCommand bibitem
47345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47347 name "Documentation"
47348 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47352 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47358 \begin_inset Index idx
47361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47363 -packages ! nomencl
47369 \begin_inset Newline newline
47373 \begin_inset Flex URL
47376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47378 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47386 \begin_layout Bibliography
47387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47388 LatexCommand bibitem
47394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47396 name "Documentation"
47397 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47401 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47407 \begin_inset Index idx
47410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47412 -packages ! prettyref
47418 \begin_inset Newline newline
47422 \begin_inset Flex URL
47425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47427 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47435 \begin_layout Bibliography
47436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47437 LatexCommand bibitem
47443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47445 name "Documentation"
47446 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47450 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47456 \begin_inset Index idx
47459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47461 -packages ! refstyle
47467 \begin_inset Newline newline
47471 \begin_inset Flex URL
47474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47476 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47484 \begin_layout Bibliography
47485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47486 LatexCommand bibitem
47492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47495 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47499 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47501 \begin_inset Newline newline
47505 \begin_inset Flex URL
47508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47510 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47518 \begin_layout Bibliography
47519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47520 LatexCommand bibitem
47526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47529 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47533 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47535 \begin_inset Newline newline
47539 \begin_inset Flex URL
47542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47544 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47552 \begin_layout Bibliography
47553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47554 LatexCommand bibitem
47560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47563 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47567 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47568 for Cyrillic languages:
47569 \begin_inset Newline newline
47573 \begin_inset Flex URL
47576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47578 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47586 \begin_layout Bibliography
47587 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47588 LatexCommand bibitem
47594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47597 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47601 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47603 \begin_inset Newline newline
47607 \begin_inset Flex URL
47610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47612 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47620 \begin_layout Bibliography
47621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47622 LatexCommand bibitem
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47631 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47635 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47637 \begin_inset Newline newline
47641 \begin_inset Flex URL
47644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47646 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47654 \begin_layout Bibliography
47655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47656 LatexCommand bibitem
47662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47665 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47669 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47671 \begin_inset Newline newline
47675 \begin_inset Flex URL
47678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47680 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47688 \begin_layout Bibliography
47689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47690 LatexCommand bibitem
47696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47699 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47703 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47705 \begin_inset Newline newline
47709 \begin_inset Flex URL
47712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47714 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47722 \begin_layout Bibliography
47723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47724 LatexCommand bibitem
47730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47733 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47737 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47739 \begin_inset Newline newline
47743 \begin_inset Flex URL
47746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47748 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47756 \begin_layout Bibliography
47757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47758 LatexCommand bibitem
47764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47767 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47771 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47773 \begin_inset Newline newline
47777 \begin_inset Flex URL
47780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47782 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47790 \begin_layout Bibliography
47791 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47792 LatexCommand bibitem
47798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47801 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47805 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47807 \begin_inset Newline newline
47811 \begin_inset Flex URL
47814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47816 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47824 \begin_layout Bibliography
47825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47826 LatexCommand bibitem
47832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47835 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47839 about new features in
47845 \begin_inset Newline newline
47849 \begin_inset Flex URL
47852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47854 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47862 \begin_layout Standard
47863 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47897 \begin_inset Note Note
47900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47908 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47909 bibliography is the second one:
47917 \begin_layout Standard
47918 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47919 LatexCommand bibtex
47920 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47921 options "biblio/alphadin"
47928 \begin_layout Standard
47929 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47933 \begin_layout Standard
47934 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47935 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47941 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47942 LatexCommand printindex